JP2019093044A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. One of the plurality of types of images is a first image and one of the plurality of types of images is a second image. A first performance, in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at a first position in the display means, and a second performance, in which the first image is moved from the first position to the second position and the first image is overlapped with the second image and cannot be seen at the second position, can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing display effects using a display device triggered by winning of a gaming ball in a starting opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform display effects using a character image, a symbol or the like.

JP, 2016-29956, A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. In addition, the reference numerals in the parentheses in the column, the supplementary explanation, and the like indicate the correspondence with the embodiments to be described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited at all. .

Application Example 1
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position, and the first image is the first image. It is possible to execute a second effect which moves from the position of the second position to the second position and disappears in the second position so as to overlap with the second image.

Application Example 2
The gaming machine described in the application example 1 further includes
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first image appears from the second image after the second effect.

Application Example 3
The gaming machine according to the application example 2,
A game machine characterized in that the first image of the third effect appears from the side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image.

Application Example 4
The gaming machine according to Application Example 2 or Application Example 3 further includes
It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the first image stops at a third position after the third effect.

Application Example 5
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.

Application Example 6
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 5 further includes:
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.

  According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of a game machine. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on a sub control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating sub ROM and sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination tables T1-T4. It is an explanatory view of jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of electric cho open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of a big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member open pattern judging table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a 2nd flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special symbol decision processing. 6 is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric role processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flow chart of game state setting processing. It is a flow chart of V field sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of holding ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows sub control main processing. It is a flowchart of sub side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of pre-reading production decision processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of change production start processing. It is an explanatory view of main production pattern decision table T52. It is explanatory drawing of a chance improvement presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during change production. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of a movable role thing. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation | movement production | presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation | movement production | presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial enlarged display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial enlarged display effect B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an operation unit partial enlarged display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement effect A. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing an operation unit image that is a projection effect B; It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement production C. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing an operation unit image that is a projection movement effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon * operation part image movement presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon * operation part image movement presentation C. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing a hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon * operation part image superimposition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon * operation part image superimposition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon * operation part image superimposition effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon non-display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon non-display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon non-display production C. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing an operation count effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation count production B (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation count production B (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating timer image movement presentation A. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing timer image movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating timer image movement presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer image inclination display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer image inclination display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer image inclination display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer button presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer button presentation B. FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram for describing a timer simulated series effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timer simulated series effect B. It is a figure for explaining pending change production A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing pending change effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending change production C. It is a figure for demonstrating acquisition ball number display production. It is a figure for demonstrating payout display effect A. FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram for describing a payout display effect B. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing a winning image / character image superposition effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a winning image / character image superposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating a prize image / character image superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating meter effect A in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating meter effect B in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect A in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display production B in a button image. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a plurality of fluctuation effects A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a plurality of fluctuation effects B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a plurality of change effects C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge production A (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge production A (failure). FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an operation charge effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating false continuation point presentation A. In FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pseudo | simulation consecutive point presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer freeze production A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timer freeze effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timer freeze effect C. It is a figure for explaining chance up meter production A. It is a figure for demonstrating chance up-meter effect B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining chance up meter production C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing hold timer effect A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing hold timer effect B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing hold timer effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer delivery ball acquisition presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timer popped ball acquisition effect B. FIG. 34 is a diagram for describing a timer pop-out ball acquisition effect C.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in agreement with the left-right direction as viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that causes a game ball to be fired based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball is won in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) which forms an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and the handle 60, the ball striking plate supply plate (upper plate) 61, and the surplus ball tray (lower plate ), A presentation button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed at the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53, and stores gaming balls. The surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is disposed below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores gaming balls that can not be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit disposed in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect or the like to be executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that simulates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect or the like that is executed along with the progress of the game. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of presentation etc. executed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations of a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are disposed on the upper left and the upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53. The movable frame 600 is configured to be displaceable from the stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state projecting above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (heso) 19, and a normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a normal winning opening 27, an out opening 16, and indicators And 40.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a display image display area in which the display design (decorative design) 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a held image display in which the held images 9A, 9B are displayed. An area and a reserve digest image display area in which the reserve digest image 9C is displayed is included. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing a hold, and are also referred to as a hold icon or a first hold icon. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending icon or the second pending icon. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variation display of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b described later by a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when the jackpot is won, the production symbols are stopped and displayed with a target such as "777". In the case of an out of place, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose eye such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variation display of the effect pattern, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction, or may be an aspect other than that. It is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set as to which combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "variation effect of decorative symbol" or simply "variation effect". In addition, this variation design of the decorative symbol counts the production in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the stop thereof as one variation production (one cycle of variation production). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7 a a jackpot effect performed in parallel to the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect pattern, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Also, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (the fourth symbol, not shown) May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a hold image 9B according to the first hold display area for displaying the hold image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure hold described later and the number of memories for the second special view hold described later. And a second reserved display area. By the display of the reserve images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special view reserve displayed on the first special view reserve display 43a described later and the second special view reserve displayed on the second special view reserve display 43b The memory number of can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserve digest image display area includes a reserve digest display area for displaying the reserve digest image 9C. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (reproduction figures 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and by the display of the reserve digest image 9C, the first special view reserve or the second special view reserve It can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the character is to be digested ("digestion with special feature reserve" described later).

  The center decoration 10 is disposed near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is attached with a movable so-called gimmick, a movable board 15 (also referred to as a movable part 15). At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 is formed. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp unit 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet where the gaming balls flow in and an outlet where the gaming balls flow out, and the gaming balls having flowed in from the inlet flow out to the stage 11 from the outlet.

  The fixed winning device (Heso) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball) the ease of entering the gaming ball does not always change The mouth, the fixed start mouth) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is the trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like, a jackpot determination, and the like.

  The normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entrance, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chow 22 includes the movable member 23 in front of the second start port 21, and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by a power chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 is only required to easily enter the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Entry into the ball may be possible.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow passage of the game ball. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery which determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (the random number per hit) and the hit determination or the like.

  Here, with "lottery of special symbol", when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is determined in advance. It is the processing which judges whether it is a big hit by comparing with the value corresponding to "big hit". The lottery result of the "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is made. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is notified to the player more effectively by this symbol matching game.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the gate 28, “random symbol lottery” acquires a random number for ordinary symbol determination, and compares the acquired random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. It is a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Also about the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball does not just pass the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the ordinary symbol display 42 described later, and the predetermined fluctuation When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (turned on or off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big prize device (the first attacker, the first special variable prize device) 31 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big prize port (the first special prize port) 30 , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening and closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 which permits or inhibits the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). In the first large winning opening 30, when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball can enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (nonspecific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening and closing member 71, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which gaming balls having passed the first large winning opening 30 can pass inside the first large winning device 31 . The first large winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects a winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39 and detects the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V opening and closing member 71 distributes the gaming balls having passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71. The V opening and closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to In the first state (rotational state) distributed to the V area 39, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the second state (stop state) is positioned at the origin and distributes the gaming ball to the non-V area 70. . The V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, as long as it has a function of distributing gaming balls having passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in the retracted state (first state) for distributing the gaming ball to the V area 39. When the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed for non-V area 70 It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive operating hole. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation opening. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of gaming balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first winning device ejection sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of gaming balls having passed the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed on the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and a second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 Is equipped. The second big winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 which inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 37 is driven by the second big winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state.

  The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3 and discharges the game balls, which have not been won in any winning port, out of the game area 3. The indicator 40 is disposed near the center of the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

  The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A method of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down is referred to as "left-hand strike". On the other hand, how to hit the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a winning to the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured such that winning to the gate 28, passing to the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35 can be aimed at right-handed.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special view reserve display 43a, and a second special view reserve display 43b. , And a general drawing reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41 b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays an ordinary symbol. The first special view hold display 43a displays the number of stored operation reserve (first special view hold) of the first special symbol display 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of storage of the operation reserve (the 2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The common drawing reserve display 44 displays the number of stored operation reserve (general drawing reserved) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Also, the first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a "special view hold indicator 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varying display) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops it to display a lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 (a special symbol drawing lottery , Announce the result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbols (stop symbols, special symbols derived and displayed as display results of variable display) to be stopped and displayed are one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) of a predetermined big hit stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 with an open pattern according to the type of the displayed big hit symbol (type of big hit winning) displayed. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and the special symbol according to the result of the lottery per special symbol is displayed according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, “○○ ●● ○○ ●●” (○: on, ●: off) and so on from the left 1, 2 , 5,6 display the jackpot symbol that the LED lights up. In the case of a loss, a loss design in which only the LED at the rightmost side is lit, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as a lost design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is made over a predetermined variation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may be lighted so that light repeatedly flows from the left to the right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning (entering) of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for the winning are , And is temporarily stored in the special-image storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special view reservation, and if it is a winning to the second starting opening 21 , And is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special view reserve. There is an upper limit to the number of special view reservations that can be stored in each special view reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is both the first special view reservation storage area 85a and the second special view reservation storage area 85b. It is four. The special figure reservation stored in the special view reservation storage area 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special view reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means that a jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and variable display of a special symbol for showing the determination result is performed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 can not be made immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize, with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special feature reservations is displayed on the special feature reservation display 43. The first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are each configured of, for example, four LEDs. Each special feature reservation display 43 displays the number of special feature reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special feature reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol variably (variable display) and then displays it in a stop to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbols stop-displayed (a common figure stop symbol, a normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) are one normal symbol selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols by normal symbol lottery. In the case where the common figure stop symbol is a predetermined specified normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 in the opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display device 42 is configured of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol with both LEDs turned on is displayed as "○○" ((: on, ●: off). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as "● ○". You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as normal loss design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may light alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is held as a common drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) It is memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of common drawing reservations that can be stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general drawing reservation stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the common drawing reservation becomes possible. Digestion of a common drawing reserve refers to determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the common drawing reserve, and execution of variable display of a normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 can not be made immediately after the passage, that is, winning is performed during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even in the case where there is a certain number, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of common drawing reservations is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 44. The general drawing hold display 44 is constituted of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing holdings by lighting the LEDs by the number of general drawing holdings.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to the game profit such as the jackpot lottery and the transition of the game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control regarding effects to be executed with the progress of the game, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as at least the sub control substrate 90 is provided.

  The main control board 80 is provided with a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 stores a main ROM 83 storing a program for controlling the progress of a game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 executing a program stored in the main ROM 83. It contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start opening sensor 20a, the second start opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the V region A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. As the solenoids connected via the relay substrate 88, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first large winning opening solenoid 33, the second large winning opening solenoid 38, and the V open / close member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first starting opening sensor 20 a is provided in the inside of the first starting opening 20, and detects a game ball winning the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball winning in the second large winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 in the inside of the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls having passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 33 drives the open / close member 32 of the first large winning device 31. The second large winning opening solenoid 38 drives the open / close member 37 of the second large winning device 36. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 has a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special view hold indicator 43a, a second special view hold indicator 43b, a general drawing hold Display control of the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for dispensing monitoring. The payout control substrate 110 is connected to the winning ball dispenser 120, the rental ball dispenser 130, and the card unit 135, and the launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball dispensing device 120 dispenses a prize ball. The payout control board 110 drives the winning ball motor 121 of the winning ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the winning balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rental ball motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rental balls. The lent balls to be paid out are detected by the lent ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to the ball lending based on the information such as the inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. The launch device 112 detects a touch of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 when the player operates the handle 60, and detects an amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launch volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the gaming ball is fired with a strength according to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 is possible. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction control means is interposed.

  The sub control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 for storing a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 93. And the CPU 92. Details of data stored in sub ROM 93 and details of storage areas provided in sub RAM 94 will be described later. Sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another substrate via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image etc. is stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  The speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to execute voice control. Furthermore, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, and a board movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc., lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control substrate 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The movable board 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15, and controls the operation of the panel movable body 15 in accordance with the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp based on the command and the operation control of the movable board 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63 a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay substrate 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63 a to the sub control substrate 90 via the relay substrate 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The relay substrate 108 is provided with a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor or the like provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes in contact. It may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for describing a table stored in sub ROM 93. Referring to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in sub RAM 94. Referring to FIG.

  In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A), a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, and a variation pattern A determination table T6, a power chew open pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, and a V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special view reserve storage area 85, and a common view reserve storage An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit in the main control main process (described later) is set (output buffer). A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round specification command, an ending command, a game state specification command, a V passage command, a customer wait standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The V flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84 d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. Special feature reserve storage area 85 includes a first special feature reserve storage area 85a in which a first special feature reserve is stored, and a second special feature reserve storage area 85b in which a second special feature reserve is stored. In the first special view reserve storage area 85a, a random number value group (reserve information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth special reserve for the first special figure reserve. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. A first special-image retention storage area 85b is used to store a first random number group (retention information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special-image retentions. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The common drawing reservation storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a common symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth common drawing reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a drive for setting a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, drive data for driving the panel movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600, and the like. A data buffer or the like is provided.

  The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a rendering command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in the sub control main process (described later), and the a priori determination command, the hold ball number command, the change start command, and the change A stop command, an opening command, a round designating command, an ending command, a game state designating command, a V passing command, a customer waiting standby command and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94 b is an area where commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in sub control main processing (described later) An output buffer), and a change production start command, a change end command, a change production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area where counters used in sub control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special view hold effect counter, a second special view hold effect counter, and a common view hold effect counter A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, etc. are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows the random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variation pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. Is configured as. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery for deciding whether or not a big hit (big hit determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the type of the big hit that has won (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and the value in the range of 0 to 127 Take The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed among the effect symbols (decorative symbols) is left, and depending on which symbol the variably displayed effect symbols are stopped and displayed It is a state (for example, the state of "7 ↓ 7") which becomes combination of the production design which shows jackpot winning. In addition, the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to play an auxiliary game to open the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0-255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the entry into the starting opening (the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry to the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry to the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is obtained based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the common drawing reserve storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “pre-read effect random number” and the “chance up random number” at timings described later. "Pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine pre-read effect at the time of change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up performance at the time of the change performance, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “prediction effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows it. Is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8 (D) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "losing". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535 In the case of “)”, it is indicated that it is determined as “lost”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be "jackpot", and the jackpot random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" Is shown to be determined as "loss". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the main control main process (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81, whether the reach random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "reach" or "reach not". Is a table referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number is "0 to 13" in the "non-time-saving state", it is determined that "reach is present", and the reach random value is "numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to In the case of “127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach exists”, and the reach random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, in the time saving state, the reach at the time of losing is less likely to be applied than in the non-time saving state. This is to speed up the speed of digesting the Tokusou reserve by selecting more reachless losses with short fluctuation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol winning determination table T3 corresponds to whether the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "lost". It is a table referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8C, in the "non-time-saving state", when the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 2 (3 In the case of "255", it is shown that it is judged as "lost". Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)" It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation period of the normal symbol is in accordance with the gaming state (non-time-short status or time-short status) in the main control main processing (described later). Is a table that is referenced to In (D) of FIG. 8, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short time state”, and the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “1 second” in the “time reduction state”. It is shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. In the jackpot type determination table T5, according to the jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), "class of jackpot" and "special symbol of It is a table referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, regardless of the jackpot classification random value (any one of 0 to 127), jackpot classification is determined to be "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot", It is shown that the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of the special figure 2 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special view stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command" of the special game, the "round designated command", the "ending (ED) Commands can also be identified. For specific contents of "16 RV passing jackpot", "16R (15R substantial) V passing jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jacking" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" I will mention later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 for determining a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting opening 20 is won in the non-short time state, and it is determined as "lost" in the big hit determination table T1, and determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of holding balls is "1. When the variation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start hole 21 wins in a time saving state, is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, is determined as "16 RV passing planned big hit" in the big hit type determination table T5, fluctuation pattern random value It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61" when "is 0 to 10". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to 3, it is evolved through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew open pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the gaming state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric chow 22 is determined to be "open pattern 11" in the "non-short time state", and the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 12" in the "time short state". It is shown. The contents of the release pattern 11 and the release pattern 12 are shown in FIG. In the opening pattern 11, the opening operation is performed once and the opening time 0.2 second is released. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is three, the opening time per one time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is performed. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if there is a predetermined number of game ball winnings (prescribed number of winnings, maximum 10).

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8. In the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81. It is a table referenced to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "open pattern 21. When the special pattern stop symbol data is "14H" or "15H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 22". When the special pattern stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is "open". It is shown that the pattern 23 "is determined. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the release pattern 21, the release pattern 22 and the release pattern 23. The opening pattern 21 opens the first large winning opening 30 once for opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds (long opening) at opening times 1 to 13 and 15th, and opening times 1 to 14 times for opening 16th. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (long open) with an open time of 29.5 seconds. The opening pattern 22 opens the first big winning opening 30 (long opening) with the opening number of once and opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th eyes, and in the 14th and 16th eyes, the number of opening once, the opening time The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening), and the opening number of the first big winning opening 30 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening) once at the 15th opening. . The opening pattern 23 opens the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) once for the opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th and 15th eyes, and opens once for the opening number 14th. The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short open), and the opening number of the second big winning opening 35 of 29.5 seconds is opened (long open) once at the opening frequency of 16R. . However, opening of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35, even if there is a predetermined number of game ball winning (predetermined number of winning, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains It is closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9. The V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" or "21H", the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31" and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special view stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33" and the special view stop symbol data is When "15H", it is shown that the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 34". The contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34 are shown in FIG. 14 (B). In the opening pattern 31, the second opening of the V opening and closing member 71 is performed for an opening time of 0.1 second when the first winning opening 30 has a first winning at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth Rs. In 10th and 12th R, when there is the first winning of the first big winning opening 30, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when there is the second winning the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and 12th eyes, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th eyes, when the first winning combination 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is found the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when there is the first winning on the first big winning opening 30 at the second and sixth R eyes, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 seconds for the opening time, and there is the second winning. When this is done, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth Rs, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is short-opened for an open time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth R, when the first large winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of jackpot, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpot" and "loss" as a result of a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is made to open the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) with the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of big hitting) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is over There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening during the round game is included in the opening round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The type of jackpot is as shown in FIG. Here, there are two major types of jackpots, "V passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". "V passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37, and the V opening and closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage expected opening pattern) which allows passage of gaming balls to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of special figure stop symbol data 11H-14H and 21H corresponds to "V passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible to pass the gaming ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing planned opening pattern) in which passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is impossible during the jackpot game, the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71 Is a jackpot to operate. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 17H corresponds to "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the open pattern of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34) Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 doubles as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

  "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot". The "16 RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which the winning ball can not be expected. That is, "16R (essentially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (15R real) V scheduled jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. That is, 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 14R The second large winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1 R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (15R in real) V scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot in 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V open / close member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: open pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  The "V non-passing jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 having a total number of rounds of 16R but a substantial total number of rounds of 13. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effective 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R substantially. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V open / close member 71 is open, the open is short open (FIG. 14: open pattern 34) and the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" are the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 The open patterns of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and open pattern 33). That is, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low probability time short state (low probability high base state). On the other hand, “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly probable It becomes time saving state (high probability high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable jackpot" and "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot", and the gaming state after that jackpot is low certainty It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low probability high base state) or high probability time short state (high probability high base state) is reached. In other words, the gaming state after “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” is a high probability time short state (high probability high base state when the gaming ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 However, it is a latent state (a latent probability change state) that the probability is high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing planned jackpot and 60/60 for V-not scheduled planned jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all V passage scheduled jackpots. That is, when the jackpot is won by the lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 21 which can be entered by execution of the electric support control described later, it is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot performed with the game ball in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed with the game ball in the first starting port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called “high probability state”, and a state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. The high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol indicator 41 is used as compared with the case where probability variation control is not executed. There is a high probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the state where microcomputer 81 for game control controls the fluctuation time shortening control to the special symbol of special symbol indicator 41 is called “time saving state”, the state where fluctuation time shortening control is not performed is simply “non time saving state”. It is said. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10, FIG. 11) determined so that selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more frequent than in the non-time-short state when in the time saving state. The variation pattern used is judged. That is, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is executing the fluctuation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol can be varied as compared to the case where the fluctuation time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easy to select short fluctuation time as fluctuation time of display. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of the special figure reserve is increased, and a valid winning to the starting opening (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reserve) is easily generated. Thereby, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under the progress of the smooth game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability variation control and variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control on the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state and does not execute it in the non-time shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the number of normal symbol random number values (hit random number values) determined to be successful as the probability variation control of the normal symbol per unit regular symbol per shot determination table T3 in which the time saving state is larger than the non time saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than that of the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used compared to the case where probability fluctuation control is not executed. The display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol hits and the probability of becoming a symbol increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time-short state, but is 1 second in the time-short state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the open time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time short state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the power chew 22 in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control on the power chew 22. Under circumstances where the gaming control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and open time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the gaming ball is more frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of firing balls becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state not being executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called power supply control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the power control 22) is being executed. The high base state (power support control state) may not perform all the control described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing control for the elective chew 22 By performing one or more controls, it is only necessary that the electric tube 22 be more easily released than when the controls are not being executed. Further, the high base state (power support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the short time state.

  In gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state and time saving state and high base state if passage to V area 39 is made during the jackpot game . This gaming state is particularly referred to as "high probability high base state" or "high probability time short state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to the V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot, if the passage of V area 39 has not been made during the jackpot game (almost not done), normal probability state (non-high probability States (low probability states) and short and high base states. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability time short state". The low probability high base state is ended by the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) being executed, or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time-short state and the low base state (non-power-supply control state). This gaming state is particularly called "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as "normal gaming state" or "low probability non-short state (also referred to simply as non-short state)". In addition, the state during the execution of the special game (big hit game) is referred to as "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

  In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the right gaming area 3B (FIG. 1) by right hitting. The electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and the second start opening 21 is easier to win than the first start opening 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 serving as a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the right strike is performed to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start winnings (winnings on the starting opening) rather than hitting the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting the right even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the left gaming area 3A (FIG. 1) by left hitting. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chew 22 is less likely to be released compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than to the second start opening 21. It is because it has become. From this, in the low base state, in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20, the left strike is performed. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings rather than right-handed.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation explanation of the gaming control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 23) and the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 18, FIG. 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main Control In the main processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the gaming control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to receive various random number counter values (big hit random number, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, variation pattern random value) shown in FIG. , Normal symbol random number value) is added 1 and updated. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the main timer interrupt process (step S005) is possible. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the end of the main timer interrupt processing, before the start of the main timer interrupt processing next time, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the above-described main control main process (FIG. 15). That is, the update process of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and the other period (period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for the payout of a prize ball according to the type of winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start opening sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V area sensor detection process (step S106), the holding ball The number process (step S107) is sequentially performed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the holding ball number process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special view suspension indicator 43b is controlled to the display mode indicating the number based on the special diagram 2 suspension ball number described later, and the first special diagram is based on the special view 1 suspension ball number The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting mouth sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is performed based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the gaming ball passes the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbol holding balls is the number of common drawing holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of common drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the normal symbol holding ball number (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number is selected from the first to the first general drawing reserve storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls.

  In step S205, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is performed depending on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. If the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the gaming ball has won (step S205: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The special figure 2 holding ball number is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is "4" (Step S206: YES), processing will skip to Step S210. When special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding 1 to special figure 2 retention sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is done (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-value of RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) is acquired. The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b in a storage area corresponding to the current special map 2 storage ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the second special-character drawing storage area 85b for the special drawing 2 prior determination processing (FIG. 18) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 prior determination process (step S209). The details of the special view 2 prior determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. If the gaming ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 holding ball number is the number of first special figure holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of first special drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 1 holding ball number (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S2) S213). Here, the value of the big hit random number counter, the value of the big hit type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208). The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a in the storage area corresponding to the current special view 1 suspension ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the first special-character drawing storage area 85a for the special drawing 1 prior determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 advance determination process (step S214). The details of the special view 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special view 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the predetermination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Do. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to determine in advance whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the high probability state table (big hit determination value “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine in advance whether it is a jackpot by reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is determined in advance as "jackpot", and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is "loss". In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table T1 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, it is used for prejudgment different from the jackpot judgment table T1. Prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table of

  If the result of the jackpot prior determination is “lost” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot prior determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type advance determination (step S305). In the jackpot type advance determination, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special view 2 relationship random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208) To get Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance that “16 RV passage planned jackpot”. In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type judgment table T5 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the advance judgment different from the jackpot type judgment table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern prior determination. More specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And, get reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (time saving flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the presence / absence prior determination result of the reach obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of holding balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected due to differences in the number of holding balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot prior determination result and the reach presence / absence prior determination result, the reach presence loss is determined in advance, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of holding balls is "1 to 2". In the case of “”, two patterns of the variation pattern “P64” to be selected and the variation pattern “P68” to be selected when the number of holding balls is “3 to 4” are selected. In the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The prior determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from.

  In step S307, the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates an advance determination command. The predetermination command includes a jackpot advance determination result, (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type predetermination result), and a fluctuation pattern predetermination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special view 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special view 2 prior determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the gaming control microcomputer 81 is a table for the normal probability state (big hit determination value “0” to “164” in the big hit determination table T1. It determines beforehand whether it is a jackpot based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is determined in advance as the “jackpot”, and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that the “loss” is made. Note that the jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Since the processes of steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special view 2 advance determination process (FIG. 18) described above, the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the symbol is changing normally (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the variation of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of holding balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If there is one or more holding ball number (step S503: NO), the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes the gate 28 in the state where the number of balls in the normal symbol is "0", the number of balls in the normal symbol is temporarily "1" in step S203 of the start opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, in the present step S504, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of balls held for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then step S1404 and steps in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol random number value (as the determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the common drawing suspension) of the common drawing suspension storage area 86 Read the random number value). Then, it is determined whether or not a hit is made using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether the time saving state or not), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be "loss" (See FIG. 8 (C)).

  Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 to change the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D) . The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

  In step S508, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and has ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (step S508: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "losing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the power chew open pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the electric chew open pattern judgment table T7 to use the open pattern of the electric chew 22. Choose Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-short state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-short state. After the opening pattern is selected, the gaming control microcomputer 81 starts the power-on operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

  In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the electric chow 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time for which the electric chow 22 is closed after the operation time of the electric chow 22 is closed It is that one of the achievements is satisfied. The operation time of the electric chow 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521) Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is “1” of “special operation status”, Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric combination processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric role processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special view 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the special figure 2 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads the storage location of the hold information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view hold storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the second special-image hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-described steps, the second Tokusou reserve is digested in the order in which it is suspended. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the holding image 9B (the leftmost holding image 9B among the four holding images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, the reserve images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9B from the left among the four reserve images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” ( Step S1407). When the special figure 1 reservation ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the first special image hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above-described steps, the first special map reservation is digested in the order in which it is held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the hold image 9A at the right end of the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, reserve images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9A from the left among the four reserve images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one first Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. The gaming control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on / off the demonstration screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special view suspension is executed only when the second special view suspension is "0". That is, the second special view reserve digest is executed prior to the first special view reserve digest. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special view suspension is a jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot) for the player with a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special view suspension. It is easy to win the

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is made using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the big hit is made based on the high probability state table (big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1 judge.

  In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), whether the jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1 It is determined whether or not.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special view reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special view reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) according to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the special figure stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520) , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time saving state is made depends on whether the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the time saving state is not set (step S1600: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special view 1 (step S1603: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is carried out based on the special figure stop symbol data being done.

  If the jackpot type is V passage planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the microcomputer for gaming control 81 changes with reference to the non-time-short state V passage planned jackpot table of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view suspension) of the second special view suspension storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special figure retention) of the first special figure retention storage area 85a is read out. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time short state V passing scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P1 in FIG. The part from “P3” to “P3”, and from “P21” to “P23” as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one from "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

  If the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot (step S1604: NO), the microcomputer for game control 81 refers to the table for non-time-short state V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time short state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, a portion ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. Part) is referenced. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time-short state, in the reach determination table T2, the table for the non-time-short state (the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value) is a portion of “0” to “13”) Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach presence loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach presence loss table (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-short status reach, a portion corresponding to reach-with-miss in fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P7” in In the part "P14", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P24" to "P31"). In Special Figure 1, any one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In Special Figure 2, any of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works. That is, in both of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, when the number of holding balls is “3” to “4”, the fluctuation time is compared with when the number of holding balls is “1” to “2”. Short variation patterns are more likely to be selected. This makes it possible to speed up the speed at which special figures are suspended when the number of balls held is large.

  If the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the no reach loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-short time reach non-reach loss, a portion corresponding to non-reach non-reach out of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” in special figure 1 to In the part "P16", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P32" to "P33". In Special Figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Here also, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works.

  When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). The processes in steps S1613 to S1619 are the same as the processes in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 to be referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 have already been described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. It is different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, while the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short time state is referred to, in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time short state is used. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is V passage scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to V passage scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for time shortening state shown in FIG. Are referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and the special pattern 2 refers to “P61” to “P63” as the variation pattern. From the read variation pattern random number value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot, a portion corresponding to V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. "To" P46 "is referred to. One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern (step S1630) and ends the present processing. The information of the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Process during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and has ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing in response to the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol with a symbol according to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and the present process is ended. Thereby, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination etc. for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member according to the type of the jackpot winning (step S1803). Specifically, with reference to the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special view stop symbol data, and the determined open pattern set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 from the special view stop symbol data with reference to the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14) and sets the determined open pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "open pattern 31" is set as the open pattern of the V open / close member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot which has been won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set to the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

  After setting the release pattern, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the process ends.

[Playing state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is to count the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time reduction counter if the low probability high base state, and "160" is set in the time reduction counter if the high probability high base state. The microcomputer for game control 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not a probability change state, a probability change counter value, a time reduction state, a time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Playing state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the non-high probability state and the non-short time state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is in progress during the jackpot game.

[Special electric role processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric symbol processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) are completely opened based on the opening pattern in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening and closing member operation processing for operating the V opening and closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V open / close member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of gaming balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V open / close member operation process, according to the V open / close member open pattern T9. The V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are to be won. Details of the V open / close member operation process will be described later. After the V open / close member operation process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (YES in step S2202), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). In the time of opening the big winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and it has reached the opening start time in the first round game, or the big winning opening which is temporarily closed after opening is reopened It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is time to open the special winning opening (timing) (step S2203: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35) in accordance with the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of the big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a round designating command (step S2208). The round designating command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the round designating command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening of the big winning a prize opening of a plurality of times is not made in one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to open the large winning opening in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In step S2202 described above, if the special winning opening is open (YES in step S2202), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time for closing the special winning mouth That is, either (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening is closed. As mentioned above, it is because time (interval time) of closing of a big winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing. The gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and the value of the round counter is "0" or not A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the defined number of round games has not been digested yet, this processing is ended to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when there is a passage of gaming balls to the V region 39 in “16R (essentially 13R) V planned to pass jackpot” is “16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes to the V region 39 in the "16R (essential 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" for the player, the "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled projected jackpot" And the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 can be recognized. In addition, the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to V field 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passage planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the big hit has passed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231) and turns off the big hit flag (step S2232), and the special operation status Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thereby, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening and closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the gaming control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V open / close member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has a first prize in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether a first winning is detected (step S2503). If the first ball winning combination has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first ball winning combination is detected (step S2503: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, regardless of whether “short opening” or “long opening”, the first ball is won Sometimes it is to execute short release (here 0.1 second). Since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is very short in the short open of the V open / close member 71, the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, while the V open / close member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed, the V effective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short in accordance with the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B) and opens the V open / close member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V-effective period (including the case where the jackpot game is not executed) as a V-ineffective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be ineffective. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later) Processing (see FIG. 33)). In addition, “determining the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a as invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is performed. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V open / close member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V open / close member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. It takes into consideration the period until the gaming ball having entered the V area 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, in this case, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (V game region passes to V region 39) during the V effective period is detected, and V flag is detected when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). It is decided not to turn it on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see later-described gaming state setting processing (FIG. 32)). By doing this, the V flag is turned on based on the V passage due to the fraudulent action, and the high probability state is not set. After the short open of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if there is already a first ball winning (step S2502: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON or not (Step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has a second winning in a case where the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S 2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S 2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S 2520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open (step S 2521). If the long release is not performed (step S 2521: NO), that is, if the short release is performed, the process proceeds to step S 2540. On the other hand, if the game player is in the long open state (step S 2521: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S 2522). If the second winning combination has not been detected (step S 2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S 2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The V open / close member 71 is long open in the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B), in the case of “long open”, the long open at the winning of the second ball (here, up to 31.5 seconds) ) To execute. In this case, since one round game time is 31.5 seconds at the longest (29.5 seconds for the big winning opening maximum opening time + 2 seconds for the interval closing time), generally, the second game winning a prize The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As described later, since the V open / close member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the open time of the long open of the V open / close member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is relatively long, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30 has the V area 39 It is configured to pass. In the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the V open period as the V open period during the opening and closing of the V open / close member 71 and sets the V inactive period together with the closing of the V open / close member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S 2524), and proceeds to step S 2540.

  In step S 2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V open / close member 71 is open. If the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S 2540: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S 2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (two seconds in this case) has passed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game is over (step S 2550: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S 2551), and the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V open / close member 71, and after a few seconds (1 second in this case) after the V open / close member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S 2550: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S 2560). The closing condition of the V open / close member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V open / close member 71 if the short open is open. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the processing is ended while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closing (NO in step S2540), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Playing state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes the "non-high probability state", the "time saving state" and the "high base state" (that is, the low probability high base). This low-probability high-base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won, or the condition is met.

  On the other hand, if the V flag is ON at step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304) and sets "160" to the probability change counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Also, the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes "high probability state" and "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability high base). This high-probability-high-base state ends when either of the variable display of special symbols is performed 160 times or the next jackpot is won, or any of the conditions is met.

  In step S2309, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The gaming state designation command includes information on the gaming state which has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V-valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V open / close member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the opening and closing seconds of the V opening / closing member 71 during the twelfth round (ball brushing period) Be done. If the V effective period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Holding ball processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the holding ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S 2701). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The ball holding ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the ball holding number, and includes information about the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number . After setting of the holding ball number command, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control substrate 90 (FIG. 4) will be described on the basis of FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub control main process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub control main process. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the sub timer interrupt processing (step S4035) is possible. The sub timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, after the sub timer interrupt processing ends, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed until the sub timer interrupt processing is started next.

[Sub side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The processing during fluctuation presentation is processing for setting a command before the end of fluctuation at a specific timing during fluctuation presentation and causing the display screen 7a to execute a particular display presentation, and the details will be described later. After the fluctuation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the reception command analysis process etc. as the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Transmit to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes display effects corresponding to the received commands using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes lamp effects for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends the process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it is received (step S4415: YES), pre-reading effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “pre-reading effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed, and a pre-reading effect pattern in the case of performing the pre-reading effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when not having received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination processing is skipped. The preread effect is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special view hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), a suspension display process is performed (step S4450). In the suspension display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 based on the information about the special figure 1 reserve ball number, the special figure 2 reserve ball number, and the normal symbol reserve ball number included in the reserve ball number command The values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the common drawing hold effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of holding balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the general drawing hold effect counter, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the holding ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned holding display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it is received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the change production start process will be described later. On the other hand, when not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned change production start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), the fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation production end processing" is processing for stopping the fluctuation production performed during special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs an advance determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it is received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of the special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub RAM 94 information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the big hit winning determination included in the opening command. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94 b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 ROMs a predetermined opening effect image. , And displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the opening command is not received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process for selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or in the interval between open in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designating command, and sets information relating to the special figure stop symbol data included in the round designating command and information relating to the number of rounds in the sub RAM 94 Do. Then, a special effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94 It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. When the round designation command is not received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the type of hit indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designating command, information relating to the game state included in the game state designating command (high probability state or not, time change state or not, definite variation The sub RAM 94 holds the counter, the value of the time reduction counter, and the like. Further, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (wait for customer wait command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs predetermination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type advance determination result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation The pattern predetermination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the predetermination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for describing the configuration of the prior determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, the advance determination information storage area 94c stores prefetch presentation effect pattern information. Pre-reading effect pattern information is information which shows the contents of pre-reading effect which is executed during fluctuation production, is selected in step S4604 which it mentions later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information "losing" and fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" as the first to third special determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third special drawing 2 reservations. It is stored in the storage area, and a state in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in the special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary determination information included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth in the special figure 2 reserve. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the big hit determination information “big hit”, the big hit type information “21H”, and the fluctuation pattern information “P61” are stored. In addition, together with the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawing 2 suspension and the corresponding areas corresponding to the fluctuation, “pattern A” as the preread effect pattern information "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the predetermination information shift process is performed after the change ends from the state of FIG. 39B. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, 4 The prior determination information of the storage area is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94 c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether the "big hit" or the "reach with loss" can be determined, for example, by the change pattern prior determination result (change pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the present process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading effects. On the other hand, when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "big hit" or "reach with loss" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to perform pre-reading effect, And, pre-reading effect pattern selection is done (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect Whether or not to perform, and a pre-reading effect pattern when performing pre-reading effect is decided.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the preliminary determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random number value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and the pre-reading effect random number value is "56 to 67" as a pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. In addition, when the pre-determination result is “reach with loss” and the pre-reading effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the pre-reading effect is “absent”, and the pre-reading effect random number value is “108 to 114” as the pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. The type and content of the pre-reading effect pattern, and the range of the random value to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, among the first to fourth storage areas, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The preread effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, and the area concerned Also set "pattern A". Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is executed also in the fluctuation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) executed before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . In addition, it is based on the progress condition of the said fluctuation production whether the prefetch effect is performed by the fluctuation production corresponding to the said area | region. That is, if the timing to execute the pre-reading effect has already passed in the variation effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Change production start process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the fluctuation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special view stop symbol data included in the change start command and information on the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes gaming state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination processing of the special view 1 or the special view 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs key effect pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is based on the basic configuration of the change effect (for example, the display and switching of the background image on the image display device 7, the display and operation of a predetermined character, and the output of melody and sound effect using the speaker 67 , And lighting control of lamps, etc.). The fluctuation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and pre-reading effect on this basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the main effect pattern with reference to the main effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a base effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing normal reach rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP1 rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP2 rendering, and a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP3 rendering A plurality of basic effect patterns are set to perform a no reach non-stop effect. The type of the core rendering pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, a key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, a base effect pattern for performing a no reach loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the main effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the fluctuation effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern with reference to the acquired random value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 for determining the change effect pattern of the special view 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. In addition, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, as the chance-up effect pattern, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3” and “ANO” are set. These chance presentation patterns correspond to the various chance-up presentation described later. The type and content of the chance-up effect pattern are not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R etc. You may decide By these, it is determined what kind of effect to be performed as the fluctuation effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in the above steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 changes the fluctuation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends the present process. A fluctuation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation production timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process (FIG. 36: step S 4305) in the time of the variable effect production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variable effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before the end of the change in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command to notify the image control board 100 or the like that the effect control microcomputer 91 has a specific timing during the variable stage effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. Switching of the effect contents, display of a specific image, and the like are performed according to the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

  If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set a command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is judged whether or not there is prefetch presentation effect pattern information in the area of the prior judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the sub command generation area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 causes the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 to start the pre-reading effect for displaying the pre-reading effect image. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before the end of change is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect in which the preview image is faded.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. A buffer or the like appearing in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation presentation start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). If it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the fluctuation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received change effect start command, reads a predetermined change effect image instructed in the change effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device Display. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the end of fluctuation is received from the sub control substrate 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes a command before the end of change, and when the command before the end of change includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the preliminary image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the preliminary fading effect is to fade the preliminary image. Do. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation rendering end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 the image on which the change effect is displayed in a stopped state, and displays the changed effect stop display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In the other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7 Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is ended.

9. Operation of Movable Part (Panel Movable Body 15) FIG. 46 is a diagram for describing the operation of the movable part (panel movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the board movable body 15 in the game effect (display effect), the initial operation at the time of power on, and the like. The movable plate 15 is at the home position in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the movable plate 15 is in the unfolded position in the position shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 can movably control the board movable body 15 from the home position to the unfolded position. The movable board 15 is basically at the home position, and is controlled movably to the unfolded position by the effect control microcomputer 91 according to the display effect (game effect). The movable board 15 is disposed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in front of the display screen 7a) when movably controlled to the unfolded position, in other words, viewed from the player, the display screen 7a It is arranged at the position which overlaps with the predetermined field of. Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking the predetermined area of the display screen 7a as viewed from the player. Further, the movable board 15 is provided with a star-shaped hole 15a at the center. Therefore, when the board movable body 15 is in the unfolded position, a part of the area of the display screen 7a can be seen from the hole 15a. In addition, when the movable plate 15 is at the home position, the movable plate 15 does not overlap the display screen 7a.

10. An example of effects according to the present embodiment, an example of effects, a modification, and an example of an example of each effect according to the present embodiment (an example of a display effect, an example of a movable object effect). Moreover, the effect example with respect to the presentation example, a modification, and an aspect example are also match | combined and demonstrated.
As described above, the effects to be described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, and prior determination information) transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 81, the microcomputer 91 (for presentation control) This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is performed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted.

  Button image operation presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. This button image operation presentation can be performed during variation presentation of a decorative symbol, during reach presentation (super reach presentation), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the button image operation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. It is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Button image operation effect A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect A. In the button image operation effect A, first, the first button image display of FIG. 47 (A) is executed. The first button image display is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold icons) 9C move in the left direction (black arrow direction) and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps the effect pattern. In the present specification, “overlap of images” means that it appears to the player as overlapping, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, when at least a part of one image displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing by the other image, it can be said that the images overlap.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47C, in a state where the first button image BI1 and the second button image BI2 are displayed, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1. . Next, as shown in FIG. 47D, with the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2 and the third button image BI3 displayed, the fourth button image is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1. BI4 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47E, with the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, the third button image BI3 and the fourth button image BI4 displayed, the lower left of the first button image BI1 The fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 displayed, the characters of “press !!!” for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. An image (button operation promoting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Button image operation effect B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect B. As compared with the button image operation effect A of FIG. 47, the button image operation effect B differs in the timing at which the second to fourth button images disappear from the display screen 7a. The first button image display of FIG. 48 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 47 (A). That is, the first button image BI1 is displayed, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C move in the left direction, and the frame is out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48B, in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps the effect pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined number of seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48C, substantially simultaneously with the disappearance of the second button image BI2 from the display screen 7a, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined number of seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48D, the fourth button image BI4 is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1 substantially simultaneously with the disappearance of the third button image BI3 from the display screen 7a. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined number of seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48E, substantially simultaneously with the disappearance of the fourth button image BI4 from the display screen 7a, the fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the lower left direction of the first button image BI1. The fifth button image BI5 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48F, in the state where the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 are displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of “Press !!!” and the timer bar TBI are displayed. Ru. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is longer than the display time of the second to fourth button images.

[Button image operation effect C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect C. The button image operation effect C differs from the button image operation effect B of FIG. 48 mainly in that an effect of moving the button image is performed. In the first button image display of FIG. 49 (A), the first button image BI1 is displayed as in FIG. 48 (A), but the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold Icon 9C is not moved but is displayed as it is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps the effect pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined number of seconds, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49C, the light ball image moves in the lower right direction of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the third button image BI3 is displayed. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed inclined to the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined number of seconds, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49D, the light ball image moves to the right of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the fourth button image BI4 and the first button image BI1 both move in the lower left direction, and then stop. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), in a state where the first button image BI1 and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed, the button operation prompting image OPI of “Press !!!” and the timer bar TBI are displayed. Ru. The timer bar TBI overlaps a part of the fourth button image BI4. The display time of the fourth button image BI4 is longer than the display time of the second and third button images.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of button image operation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the second button image is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1. A second button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 in a state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed after the first effect that the BI2 is displayed and the first effect. And can be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, with the first button image BI1 displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the first effect that the second button image BI2 is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1 After the first effect, in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the left of the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, since the button images appear one after another at different positions on the display screen 7a, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect that the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. , The second button image BI2 is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the second effect that the fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the left of the first button image BI1 in a state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is Do not show. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform the effect that the button image which has disappeared from the display screen 7a appears again at different positions on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect that the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. It is longer than the display time. Also,
As shown in FIG. 49, while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the display time of the fourth button image BI4 in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the right side of the first button image BI1 is When the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is longer than the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, a change can be given to the display time of the button image that appears in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the second button image BI2 and the fifth button image BI5 are respectively larger than the first button image BI1. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 and the fourth button image BI4 are respectively larger than the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player at the time of displaying the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 is displayed inclined with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impart a feeling of excitement to the display of the second button image BI2 that appears in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the second button image BI2 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. According to this configuration, the second button image BI2 appearing in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed appears to be located at the back of the decoration image, and a sense of depth can be produced on the display. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the state where the fifth button image BI5 is displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of "Press!" Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in a state where the fourth button image BI4 is displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI is displayed. According to this configuration, since the button operation promotion image OPI appears together with the button image that appears in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension, thereby improving interest. be able to.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of button image operation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, effects are performed using a button image that represents the appearance of the effect button 63. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image representing the appearance of the operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63. For example, instead of the button image, an image representing the appearance of the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used to perform the same effect. Also, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. Moreover, you may use arbitrary images, such as a specific character, a figure, a symbol, a character image, other than the image of an operation part.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the button image operation effects A to C shown in FIGS. 47 to 49 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. For example, in the button image operation effect A, the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are framed out from the display screen 7a. However, as in the button image operation effect C, the frames may not be framed out. Also, the button image operation effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, and other effect contents may be added. In addition, the button image operation effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions in FIGS. 47 to 49 and may be arbitrary positions with respect to the positions of the button image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, five button images (first to fifth button images) appear in FIGS. 47 and 48, and four button images (first to fourth button images) appear in FIG. However, the number of button images appearing in the button image operation effect may be one to three, or six or more.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A1-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
And a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing the appearance of the operation means,
A first image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in a first direction in a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means. And the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction in a state where the first image is displayed after the first effect and the first effect. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect.
[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the second effect, the second image is not displayed.
[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
A game machine characterized in that a display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than a display time of the second image in the first effect.
[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the second image and the third image are respectively larger than the first image.
[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4, wherein
In the first effect, the second image is displayed tilted with respect to the first image.
[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5, wherein
In the first effect, the second image may be displayed so as to overlap with a decorative symbol.
[Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6, wherein
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
A game machine characterized in that the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position in a state where the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

  The operation part partial enlarged display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The operation part partial enlarged display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol or during the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the operation portion partial enlarged display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation part partial enlarged display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for describing an operation unit partial enlarged display effect A. In the operation part partial enlarged display effect A, first, the sword member image display of FIG. 50 (A) is executed. This sword member image display is performed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center right of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI also includes a first sword button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. That is, since the sword button 65 is provided at the end of the handle of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1), the first sword button image PSB is drawn at the end of the handle of the sword represented by the sword member image ASI. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), while the sword member image ASI is displayed, the second sword button image SBI appears from the position of the first sword button image PSB of the sword member image ASI. The second sword button image SBI is an image representing the appearance of the sword button 65, as in the case of the first sword button image PSB. In other words, the second sword button image SBI is an image representing a part (first sword button image PSB) of the sword member image ASI.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the second sword button image SBI moves in the lower left direction while being enlarged, and stops at the left side of the sword member image ASI. Thereby, in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed, a second sword button image SBI larger than the sword member image ASI is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), in the state where the sword member image ASI and the second sword button image SBI are displayed, “press !!!” for urging the player to operate the effect button 63. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the sword button 65 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping with the second sword button image SBI. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI.

  When the player operates the sword member 64, as shown in FIG. 50E, the second sword button image SBI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the explosion image EXI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with the lost pattern.

[Operation part partial enlarged display effect B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for describing an operation unit partial enlarged display effect B. In the operation section partial enlarged display effect B, first, the first button image display of FIG. 51 (A) is executed. The first button image display is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the right of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), in a state where the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB appears from the first button image BI. Similar to the first button image BI, the second button image BB is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the second button image BB moves in the left direction while being enlarged and is stopped in a state where a part of the left side of the second button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a. . As a result, in a state where the first button image BI is displayed, a second button image BB in which a portion on the left side is not displayed but is larger than the sword member image ASI is displayed. Since both the first button image BI and the second button image BB represent the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1), the second button image BB in which a part of the left side is not displayed is the first button image BI. It is an image showing a portion (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51D, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the first button image BI and the second button image BB with part of the left side being framed out are displayed. A character image ("button operation promotion image") OPI for "press !!!" and a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping the second button image BB. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI.

  When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 51E, the second button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with the lost pattern.

[Operation part partial enlarged display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for describing an operation unit partial enlarged display effect C. In the operation part partial enlarged display effect C, first, the select button image display of FIG. 52 (A) is executed. This select button image display is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a select button image SSI representing the appearance of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower right of the display screen 7a. The select button image SSI is composed of four button images corresponding to four buttons (left button, right button, upper button, lower button) constituting the select button 68 (FIG. 1). Here, in the select button image SSI, an image corresponding to the left button of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is called “first left button image LI”, and an image corresponding to the right button I call it ". In addition to the select button image SSI, a plurality of panel images PN are displayed on the display screen 7a. A predetermined image (for example, a character image) may be drawn on each panel of the panel image PN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), while the select button image SSI is displayed, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are displayed below the display screen 7a. Similar to the first left button image LI and the first right button image RI, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI represent the appearance of the left button and the right button in the select button image SSI. . The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are larger than the select button image SSI. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are images representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52C, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the select button image SSI, the second left button image PLI, and the second right button image PRI are displayed. A character image ("button operation prompting image") OPI for "press !!!" and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the select button 68 are displayed. The timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI.

  When the player operates the left button of the select button image SSI, as shown in FIG. 52D, the color of the second left button image PLI changes, and the panel image PN is selected and enlarged and displayed. Panels are replaced. When the operation valid period of the select button 68 ends, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI disappear from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the selected panel image PN is enlarged and displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of operation part partial expansion display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), a second sword button representing a portion (first sword button image PSB) of the sword member image ASI in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed. An effect in which the image SBI is displayed is executable. Further, as shown in FIG. 51C, while the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a part other than the left side of the effect button 63) is displayed. The effect to be played is feasible. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), with the select button image SSI displayed, a second left button image PLI and a second right button image representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI An effect that PRI is displayed is executable. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50C, the second sword button image SBI representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is larger than the sword member image ASI . Further, as shown in FIG. 51C, the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is larger than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI are larger than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI. In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52C, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh presentation and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50F, the display time of the second sword button image SBI is shorter than the display time of the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 51A to 51F, the display time of the second button image BB is shorter than the display time of the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52A to 52F, the display time of the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI is shorter than the display time of the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh presentation and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 64 is capable of performing a first operation to push the entire sword member 64 and a second operation to push the sword button 65, as shown in FIG. The member image ASI shows a portion movable at the first operation (sword member pushing operation) of the sword member 64, and the second sword button image SBI shows a second operation of the sword member 64 (sword button pushing operation) It shows parts that move from time to time. In addition, the select button 68 can execute a first operation to press the upper button and the lower button and a second operation to press the left button and the right button, and as shown in FIG. A portion movable at the time of the first operation (up and down button press operation) of the select button 68 is shown, and the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are the second operation of the select button 68 (right and left button press (Operation) shows a movable part. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh presentation and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the operation part partial enlarged display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, a first operation unit image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, or the select button 68 and a second one representing a part of the operation unit image The effect is produced using the operation unit image of. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image representing the appearance of other types of operation units as the first operation unit image. For example, the first operation unit image may be an image of any operation unit such as a handlebar image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the operation part partial enlarged display effects A to C shown in FIG. 50 to FIG. 52 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Moreover, the operation part partial enlarged display effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, and other effect contents may be added. In addition, with regard to the positions of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon, the operation unit partial enlarged display effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions in FIGS.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A2-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
And a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing a portion of the operation means displayed on the first image,
It is possible to execute a first effect in which the second image is displayed at the second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means. .
[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1,
In the first effect, the second image is larger than the first image.
[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an operation acceptance period of the operation means,
In the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position closer to the second position than the first position of the display means.
[Aspect A2-4]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3, wherein
In the first effect, a display time of the second image is shorter than a display time of the first image.
[Aspect A2-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes A2-1 to A2-4, wherein
The operation means can execute first and second operations having different operation methods,
The first image shows a portion movable in the first operation in the operation means,
A game machine characterized in that the second image shows a portion which moves in the second operation in the operation means.

  The operation unit image will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. The operation unit image may move out during movement of the decoration pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the operation unit image includes an instruction to execute the movement effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation image of the operation unit is moved out effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the movement effect image A of the operation unit image. In the movement effect effect A of the operation unit, first, the pending icon movement effect of FIG. 53 (A) is executed. The reserved icon movement effect is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold icons) 9C move in the left direction, and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the enlargement button image appearance presentation of FIG. 53 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of being enlarged and displayed. Since the button image BB is enlarged and displayed, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out of the display screen 7 a (projected). In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button are out of the display screen 7a. A part of the displayed button image BB overlaps the effect pattern.

  Next, the button image left movement effect shown in FIG. 53 (C) is executed. Specifically, button image BB is reduced and displayed from the state of FIG. 53 (B) and moves leftward, and as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the left end portion of button image BB has a display screen. It will be in the state which carried out the frame out from 7a. Next, the button image right movement effect of FIG. 53 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves to the right from the state of FIG. 53C, and as shown in FIG. 53D, the right end of the button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a It becomes a state. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the part corresponding to the end on the right side of the effect button is out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 53 (E) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB has the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB at the same position as in FIG. 53 (B). The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 53 (F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN being displayed on the button image BB, a character image of “press !!!” for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation promotion image) OPI, A timer bar TBI indicating an effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation image of the operation unit is moved out effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the movement effect image B of the operation unit image. The operation part image protrusion movement effect B mainly differs from the movement aspect of the button image BB in comparison with the operation member image of FIG. The pending icon movement effect of FIG. 54 (A) is substantially the same as that of FIG. 53 (A). Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icons) 9C move downward and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the reverse button image appearance presentation of FIG. 54 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of being upside down and being enlarged and displayed. Since the button image BB in which the upper and lower sides are inverted is displayed in an enlarged scale, both left and right ends are framed out from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps the effect pattern.

  Next, the reverse button image left movement effect in FIG. 54 (C) is executed. Specifically, button image BB moves leftward as it is from the state of FIG. 53 (B) in which the top and bottom are inverted, and as shown in FIG. 54 (C), of button image BB, the right side of effect button 63. The portion corresponding to the frame is out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the button image rotation effect of FIG. 54 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB rotates clockwise (clockwise) from the state of FIG. 54C where the upper and lower sides are inverted, and the upper and lower sides are not inverted via the state of FIG. 54D. It will be in the state of 54 (E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the timer display effect is executed. Specifically, timer image TN is displayed on button image BB. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 54F is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN being displayed on the button image BB, a character image of “press !!!” for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation promotion image) OPI, A timer bar TBI indicating an effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation image of the operation unit is moved out effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the movement effect C of the operation unit image. The holding icon movement effect of FIG. 55 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 53 (A). Next, the sword member image appearance presentation of FIG. 55 (B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out of the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the tip of the sword and the handle is out of frame from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves in the left direction from the position of FIG.

  Next, the sword member image rotation effect shown in FIG. 55 (C) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the sword member image ASI after leftward movement, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI rotates about 45 degrees clockwise (clockwise), and stops at an angle (pose) at which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the sword member image movement effect shown in FIG. 55 (D) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (D), only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after the right rotation is out of the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and stops in a state where only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is framed out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 55 (E) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI after the downward movement is framed out from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 55 (F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN being displayed on the button image BB, a character image of “press !!!” for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation promotion image) OPI, A timer bar TBI indicating an effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation image of the operation unit moves out effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the movement effect image D of the operation unit image. The operation part image protrusion movement effect D mainly differs in the shape of the sword member image ASI compared with the operation portion image protrusion movement effect C of FIG. The sword member 64 has a shape in which the tip portion is buried in the outer frame of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 1). The sword member image ASI in FIG. 55 does not include an image representing the tip of the sword according to the actual shape of the sword member 64. On the other hand, the sword member image ASI in FIG. 56 is an image of the entire sword including the tip portion in accordance with the conceptual shape of the sword member 64. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), reach occurs in the effect pattern variation effect. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icons) 9C are not moved.

  Next, the magnified sword member image appearance presentation effect of FIG. 56 (B) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is enlarged and the shape changes so as to indicate that the sword is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis (sword lateral rotation Production). In other words, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to indicate that the sword member 64 is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out of the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the tip of the sword and the handle is out of frame from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves in the left direction from the position of FIG.

  Next, the sword member image rotation effect shown in FIG. 56 (C) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (C), in the sword member image ASI after leftward movement, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, different from FIG. 55 (C), the sword member image ASI is displayed in a reduced size and the sword lateral rotation effect is continued. In addition, the image of the sword tip is displayed on the lower end side of the sword member image ASI. The sword member image ASI rotates about 45 degrees clockwise (clockwise), and stops at an angle (pose) at which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the sword member image movement effect shown in FIG. 56 (D) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (D), in the sword member image ASI after the right rotation, only the upper end is framed out from the display screen 7a, and the sword lateral rotation effect continues. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and stops in a state where only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is framed out from the display screen 7a. The sword turn production also stops.

  Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 56 (E) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is framed out from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 56F is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (F), with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the button operation promoting image OPI for “Press !!!” and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63. Is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the operation part image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (B), the portions corresponding to the left and right end portions of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) are in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. Thus, after the first display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a and after the first display, as shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (C), of the button images BB, After the second display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that only the part corresponding to one end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a, and after the second display, FIG. D) As shown in FIG. 54E, a part of the button image BB is in a state in which only the part corresponding to the other end of the effect button 63 in the button image BB is out of the display screen 7a. The third display to be displayed is configured to be executable That. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 56 (B), the portions corresponding to the upper and lower ends of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 55 (C) (D) and FIG. 56 (C) (D) after the first display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to become Thus, the second display in which a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed such that only a portion of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the upper end portion of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a; After the display of 2, as shown in FIG. 55 (E) and FIG. 55 (E), only the part corresponding to the lower end part of the sword member 64 in the sword member image ASI is in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. And a third display in which a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed. It is. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53C, the button image is configured such that a portion corresponding to the left end of the effect button 63 is in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. In the second display in which a portion of BB is displayed, a portion of button image BB is displayed at the left end of display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 53 (D), of button images BB, the right side of effect button 63 is displayed. In the third display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the part corresponding to the end portion protrudes from the display screen 7a, the part of the button image BB is displayed at the right end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the button image BB of the third display is displayed at a position away from the position displayed in the second display in the right direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, in the second display shown in FIGS. 55C and 56D in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper end of the display screen 7a. In the third display shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and 55 (E), a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the sword member image ASI of the third display is displayed at a position away downward from the position displayed in the second display. This configuration also makes it possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the button image BB of the second display shown in FIG. 53C is displayed smaller than a part of the button image BB of the first display shown in FIG. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to indicate that the sword member 64 is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, in the third display, the timer image TN is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (E) and 54 (E), the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button image BB. Further, as shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and 56 (E), the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the sword member image ASI. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the operation part image protrusion movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the effect is produced using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect is performed using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image representing the appearance of the operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63 or the sword member 64. Also, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. Moreover, you may use arbitrary images, such as a specific character, a figure, a symbol, a character image, other than the image of an operation part.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may change so as to indicate that the effect button 63 is vertically or horizontally rotated. Similar to the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 56, the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 55 has a sword lateral rotation effect whose shape changes so as to indicate that the sword is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. You may do it.

[Modification 3]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 53 to 56 is a countdown method, it may be a count up method. Further, the timer image TN may not overlap with the operation unit image such as the button image BB or the sword member image ASI.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the operation unit images shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. 56 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. In addition, the operation unit image may not have part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, and the movement effect effects A to D may have other effect contents added thereto. In addition, with regard to the position and movement direction of the operation part image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon, the operation part images are not limited to FIGS.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
And a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
A first display in which a part of the first image is displayed on the display unit such that portions corresponding to both ends of the operation unit in the first image are in a state of being protruded from the display unit After the first display, a portion of the first image is in a state in which only a portion of the first image corresponding to one end of the operation means is out of the display means. After the second display to be displayed and after the second display, only the part corresponding to the other end of the operation means in the first image is in a state of being out of the display means It is possible to execute a third display in which a part of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second display, a portion of the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means;
In the third display, a part of the first image is displayed at a second position away from the first position in a first direction.
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
A part of the first image displayed in the second display is displayed smaller than a part of the first image displayed in the first display.
[Aspect A3-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3, wherein
A part of the first image displayed in the first display changes in shape so as to indicate a state in which the operation means is rotated.
[Aspect A3-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4, wherein
In the third display, a timer image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
In the third display, the timer image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.

  The operation unit image will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. The operation unit image may be displayed during the effect of changing the decorative symbol, during the effect of reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the operation unit image includes an instruction to execute the display effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation image of the operation unit is out display effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for describing an operation unit image protrusion display effect A. In the operation part image protrusion display effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 57 (A) is executed. The reserved icon movement effect is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icons) 9C move in the right direction and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), a button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out (projected out) from the display screen 7 a. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button are out of the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps the effect pattern.

  Next, a button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 57D is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out from the display screen 7a, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63. A character image (“button operation promotion image”) OPI of “Press!” And a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation part image shows out effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for describing an operation unit image protrusion display effect B. The operation part image protrusion display effect B is different from the operation part image protrusion display effect A in FIG. 57 in the range in which the frame is out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. FIGS. 58A and 58B are similar to FIGS. 57A and 57B.

  As shown in FIG. 58C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, a portion of the button image BB that is not the protrusion (convex portion) of the effect button 63 but a ring-shaped receiving portion provided around the protrusion is framed out from the display screen 7 a ( Protruding). The effect button 63 includes not only the protrusion but also an annular receiving portion around the protrusion. Therefore, also in the case of FIG. 58C, it can be said that portions of the button image BB corresponding to both left and right end portions of the effect button 63 are framed out (projected out) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the button operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 58 (D) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of effect button 63 are out of frame from display screen 7a, button operation promotion image OPI and timer bar TBI are displayed. It is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation part image shows out effect C]
FIG. 59 is a view for explaining an operation part image protrusion display effect C. The operation part image protrusion display effect C is different from the operation part image protrusion display effect A in FIG. 57 in that the range in which the frame is out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. FIGS. 59 (A) and (B) are the same as FIG. 57 (A) and (B).

  As shown in FIG. 59C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, a part of the button image BB that corresponds to the end on the left side of the effect button 63 is framed out of the display screen 7 a (projected). Thereafter, the button operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 59 (D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where button image BB is enlarged and a portion corresponding to the left end of effect button 63 is out of frame from display screen 7a, button operation promotion image OPI and timer bar TBI are buttons. It is displayed on the image BB.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the operation part image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), 58 (D), 59 (D), a portion corresponding to at least one end of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. Is configured to be able to execute a first effect in which the timer bar TBI is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a such that ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D) and 58 (D), in the first effect, portions of the button image BB that correspond to both ends of the effect button 63 are displayed on the display screen. A part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be out of the state 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57D, FIG. 58D and FIG. 59D, in the first effect, the timer bar TBI overlaps a part of the button image BB. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the first effect, a decorative symbol is displayed overlapping a part of the button image BB. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the operation part image shows the display effect production | presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, effects are produced using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect is performed using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same rendering using an image representing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the rendering button 63, such as the sword member 64, for example. Also, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. Moreover, you may use arbitrary images, such as a specific character, a figure, a symbol, a character image, other than the image of an operation part.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may change so as to represent the state where the effect button 63 is vertically or horizontally rotated.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the operation unit images shown in FIG. 57 to FIG. 59 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. In addition, the operation unit image may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIG. 57 to FIG. 59, or other effect contents may be added. In addition, with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation part image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon, the operation part image is not limited to FIGS.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
And a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an operation acceptance period of the operation means,
In a state where a part of the first image is displayed on the display means such that a portion of the first image corresponding to at least one end of the operation means is in a state of protruding from the display means A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine described in A4-1,
In the first effect, the display unit includes a portion of the first image such that portions corresponding to both ends of the operation unit in the first image are out of the display unit. A game machine characterized by being displayed.
[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to A4-1 or A4-2,
In the first effect, the second image is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the first image.
[Aspect A4-4]
A game machine according to any one of A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first display, a decorative symbol is displayed overlapping a part of the first image.

  The hold icon / operation unit image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. The reserved icon / operation unit image movement effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and the instruction to execute the image movement effect for holding icon / operation unit is included, the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 is It is a display effect read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for describing the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A. As shown in FIG. 60 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the presentation button 63 (FIG. 60) A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect design is started, the on-hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 60 (B) is executed. Specifically, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icons) 9C move in the right direction, and the frame is out from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, the hold icons 9A, 9B, 9C disappear from the display screen 7a, and then the button image BI1 moves to the right from the lower left position of the display screen 7a. As shown in E), stop at the lower right of the display screen 7a. That is, the button image BI1 moves to a position at which the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 60 (A) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60F, the SP reach effect is performed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed on the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B. The hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B is compared with the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A of FIG. 60, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B, the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C, and The operation mode of the button image BB is different.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of FIG. 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect pattern is started, the on-hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 61 (B) is executed. Specifically, only the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold icons) 9C, only the hold icon 9B moves in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 61C. Frame out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the button image BI1 moves downward from a position near the middle on the right side of the display screen 7a, and stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61 (E). . That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the holding image (holding icon) 9B was displayed in FIG. 61A and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61F, the SP reach effect is performed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed on the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for describing the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect C. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B and the hold digest image (the hold is concerned) on the hold display area image HA. Icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect pattern is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 62 (B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62C, the portion of the sword tip of the sword member image ASI overlaps the reserved display area image HA and disappears. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if it was stuck in the reserved display area image HA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the entire pending display area image H including the pending images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digest image (the pending icons) 9C moves downward and is displayed As the frame is out from the screen 7a, the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the sword member image ASI stops at the lower left of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62 (E). That is, as shown in FIGS. 62D and 62E, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C move downward and are framed out from the display screen 7a, At the same time, the sword member image ASI moves to a position where the reserved images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digest image (the pending icons) 9C are displayed in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 62F, the SP reach effect is performed in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for describing the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D. In FIG. 63 (A), as in FIG. 62 (A), the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and the like on the hold display area image HA. The pending digest image (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect design is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 63 (B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left, and at the left end of the display screen 7a, the sword member image ASI is The portion at the tip of the sword is stopped and displayed in a state where it is framed out of the display screen 7a. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if it was stuck at the left end of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 63C and 63D, the entire pending display area image H including the pending images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digest image (the pending icons) 9C is directed in the left direction. Move and frame out of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 63E, a sword member image movement effect is performed in which the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a and stops. That is, in the sword member image movement effect, the sword member image ASI is moved to the position where the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. Stop. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63F, SP reach effect is performed in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a pending | holding icon and operation part image movement presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60A, the hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 60 (B), with the first effect that the button image BI1 is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and with the holding icons 9A and 9B and the holding icon 9C moving to the right, As shown in FIG. 60 (D), the button image BI1 moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and stops at the position where the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are present. The effects are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and in the vicinity of the center right of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 61B, the hold icon 9B moves in the right direction as shown in FIG. 61B, and the button image BI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61D. The second effect of moving to the lower right from near the center right of the screen 7a and stopping at the position where the hold icon 9B was present is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and near the center left of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 62D, with the first effect that the sword member image ASI is displayed, the reserve icons 9A and 9B, the reserve icon 9C, and the sword member image ASI move downward and reserve It is configured to be able to execute the icons 9A, 9B, and the second effect of stopping at the position where the hold icon 9C is present. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and a sword is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 63 (C), with the first effect that the member image ASI is displayed, the reserve icons 9A, 9B and the reserve icon 9C move in the left direction, and are shown in FIG. 63 (E). Thus, the sword member image ASI is configured to be able to move downward and execute the second icons in which the holding icons 9A and 9B and the holding icon 9C are stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with another image (for example, an operation unit image), and the hold icon moves and the other image is moved. Move to the position where the hold icon was located. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, operation screen images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed on the display screen 7a together with other images (for example, hold icon) As the other image moves, the operation unit image moves to the position where the other image existed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move after the reserve icons 9A, 9B, 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. To start. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the button image BI1 starts moving after the hold icon 9B disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move to the position where the hold icon was located after the move of the hold icon Stop at that position. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the button image BI1 moves in a direction different from the moving direction of the hold icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding icon and operation part image movement presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1 or the sword member image ASI) on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon moves and the operation unit The image moves to the position where the hold icon was located. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by the hold icon and a specific image other than the operation unit image. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. That is, the gaming machine 1 executes an effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the specific image other than the operation unit image, and the hold icon moves and the specific image moves to the position where the hold icon was located. It is also good. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation screen images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed on the display screen 7a together with the hold icon, and the hold icon moves and the operation part image is held. Move to the position where the icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect with the operation unit image and a specific image other than the hold icon. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. That is, in the gaming machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image, and the effect of moving the specific image and moving the operation unit image to the specific image position is performed. You may Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using the first specific image other than the hold icon and the second specific image other than the operation unit image. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the first specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the second specific image other than the operation unit image, and the first specific image moves and the second specific image is the first specific An effect of moving to a position where the image is present may be executed. The first specific image and the second specific image are images including arbitrary characters such as a character image, figures, symbols, and the like. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 to FIG. 63, the effect is produced using the operation portion image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may use, as the operation unit image, an image representing the appearance of other types of operation units. For example, the operation unit image may be an image of any operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 5]
The display contents of the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. In addition, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, and other effect contents may be added. In addition, with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation icon, the decoration image, and the position of the hold icon, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A to D is not limited to FIGS. Good.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position, and the first image is the first image. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second image is moved from the second position to the first position while moving in the first direction from the position of.
[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2 further includes
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
In the second effect, the second image is moved from the second position after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A game machine characterized by initiating movement to a first position.
[Aspect B1-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4, wherein
In the second effect, the second image moves from the second position to the first position, and then stops at the first position.
[Aspect B1-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes B1-1 to B1-5, wherein
In the second effect, the second image moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment can also be implemented in the following manner.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position, and the first image is the first image. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position to the second direction while moving from the position of the first direction to the first direction.
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
A game machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2 is further
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect B2-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes B2-1 to B2-3, wherein
In the second effect, the second image is moved in the second direction after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A game machine characterized by starting movement.
[Aspect B2-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-4, wherein
In the second effect, the second image moves from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
In the second effect, the second image moves from the second position to the first position, and then stops at the first position.

  The hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect will be described using FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. The reserved icon / operation unit image superimposition effect may be performed during the execution of the change effect, particularly, immediately before the start of the change of the decorative symbol or immediately after the stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a change effect start command from the sub control board 90, it is executed based on the content of the change effect start command and the ball holding ball number command received before that.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect A. As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the presentation button 63 (FIG. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the effect pattern is stopped (fixed display) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 64 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A on the rightmost side of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves obliquely upward to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion disappears. As described above, in the present specification, “overlap of images” means that the images appear to overlap from the player's point of view, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, when at least a part of the first hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing by the button image BI1, it can be said that the images overlap.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 64 (C) is executed. Specifically, due to the movement of the first hold icon 9A, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A disappears. Next, the first hold icon appearing effect shown in FIG. 64 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears in the lower right direction while moving from a part of the button image BI1. Thereafter, the hold position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from a part of the button image BI1 moves in the lower right direction as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon 9C is arranged. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect B. The hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect B differs from the superimposition effect A in FIG. 64 in that the hold image (hold icon) 9B is not displayed, the position of the button image BB, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the hold image (hold icon) 9A and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed between the current position and the hold position. In this state, when the effect pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 65 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves in the right direction. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion disappears.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. Specifically, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A disappears. Next, the first hold icon appearing effect shown in FIG. 65 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears to be moving rightward from the right side of the button image BI1. That is, the first hold icon 9A appears from the opposite side (right side of the button image BI1) to the position (left side of the button image BI1) before being hidden in the button image BI1. Thereafter, the hold position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 65 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from the right end of the button image BI1 moves to the right as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon is arranged. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect C. In the hold icon / operation unit image superposition effect C, the hold icon 9C is not displayed, and the button image BB is at the hold position.

  As shown in FIG. 66A, the hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed below the display screen 7a. In this state, when the effect pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 66 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves in the right direction. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion disappears.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 66 (C) is executed. Specifically, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A disappears. Next, a button image light emission effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BI1 emits light of a specific color in order to indicate that the state is equivalent to the case where the hold icon is positioned at the hold position. This button image light emission effect is equivalent to the hold position movement completion effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a pending | holding icon and operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the position of the first hold icon 9A at the button image BI1. The second effect of moving in the direction of and becoming invisible with overlapping with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1 is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the second effect in which the first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 and disappears, the first hold icon 9A starts from the button image BI1. The third effect that appears is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A is the first hold icon before moving in the button image BI1. The position 9A is configured to emerge from the opposite side (right side) from the opposite side (left side). According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A is stopped at the hold position. It is configured to be able to execute the effect of 4. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, the effect of making the holding icon overlap with another image (here, the button image BI1) and making it invisible is achieved, thereby improving the interest be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, another image (here, the hold icon) moves toward the button image BI1, and the other image appears to overlap with the button image BI1. In order to carry out the effect that disappears, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding icon and operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A move toward the position of the button image BI1. In addition, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 and disappears. However, in the gaming machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1), and the specific image moves toward the position of the operation unit image. An effect of overlapping with the operation unit image at the position and disappearing may be executed. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A move toward the position of the button image BI1. In addition, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 and disappears. However, in the gaming machine 1, the first hold icon 9A is displayed together with the specific image other than the operation unit image, the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the specific image, and the specific position of the specific image is specified. An effect of overlapping with the image and disappearing may be executed. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the button image BI1 is shown as an example of the operation unit image in FIGS. 64 to 66, but the operation unit image may be other than the button image. The operation unit image may be, for example, a sword member image, a sword button image, or a select button image.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. In addition, the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, and other effect contents may be added. In addition, with regard to the position and movement direction of the operation icon, the decoration pattern, and the holding icon, the holding icon / operation unit image superposition effect A to C is not limited to FIGS. 64 to 66 but may be any position or movement direction. Good.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 3-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position, and the first image is the first image. It is possible to execute a second effect which moves from the position of the second position to the second position and disappears in the second position so as to overlap with the second image.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 further includes
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first image appears from the second image after the second effect.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
A game machine characterized in that the first image of the third effect appears from the side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3 is further:
It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the first image stops at a third position after the third effect.
[Aspect B3-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes B3-1 to B3-4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5 is further:
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.

  The on-hold icon non-display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The reserved icon non-display effect can be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 can be displayed as one of the pre-reading effects that are received and executed from the sub control board 90 before the end of change command.

[Hold Icon Hide Effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect A. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel images PN. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, the hold icons 9A are displayed in the first to third panel images PN from the right in the display area of the hold icon 9A, and the leftmost panel image PN is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed. Hereinafter, in the panel represented by the panel image PN, the side on which the reserve icon 9A is displayed is referred to as "front side", and the opposite side is also referred to as "back side". In FIG. 67 (A), the hold icon 9C is also displayed on another panel image different from the panel image PN.

  At a specific timing during variation, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 67 (B) is executed. Specifically, in any panel image PN of the panel images PN (here, the first to third panel images PN from the right among the four panel images PN) on which the reserve icon 9A is displayed, the panel The image changes so as to be in a state of horizontal rotation. Then, the pending icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 67 (C) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the image is changed such that the panel is in the state of horizontal rotation is an image in a state in which the panel is facing backward. That is, the panel image PN is an image in which the surface (rear surface) opposite to the side on which the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the panel surface is displayed. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed in the panel image PN is not displayed. That is, in the display area of the hold icon 9A of the display screen 7a, the hold icon can be seen when the image on the front side is displayed, and can not be seen when the image on the back side is displayed.

  Next, a panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 68D is performed. Specifically, the panel image PN in the non-display state of the hold icon 9A changes the image so that the horizontal rotation of the panel continues, and the surface of the side on which the hold icon 9A is displayed again after one round The (front) image is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68E, the hold icon 9A changes (hold change). In FIG. 68 (F), shift effect is shown. After the finalized display of the decorative symbol, the reserve icons 9A displayed in each panel image PN move one by one to the panel image PN on the right side. The hold icon 9A displayed on the rightmost panel image PN is moved to the panel image on which the hold is displayed, and is displayed on the panel.

[Hold Icon Hide Effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect B. As compared with the non-display effect A in FIG. 67, the holding icon non-display effect B differs in that a frame area image HA is displayed around the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), a frame area image HA is displayed in the area on the lower side of the display screen 7a where the reserved image (pending icon) 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed. Of the frame area image HA, four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the reserve icon 9A is displayed. One panel image is displayed in the area where the reserved icon 9C is displayed in the frame area image HA. In other words, the area where the reserve icon 9A is displayed is divided into four by the frame area image HA. The reserve icon 9A is displayed in each of the four panel images PN arranged in the area divided by the frame area image HA. In the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first to third panel images PN from the right, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the leftmost panel image PN. The operation of each panel image PN is the same as the non-display effect A in FIG.

[Hold Icon Hide Effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect C. As compared with the non-display effect A in FIG. 67, the hold icon non-display effect C differs in that the pupil frame image EF is displayed instead of the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), four pupil frame images EF are displayed in the area where the holding image (holding icon) 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A is displayed inside the pupil frame image EF. The holding icon 9A displayed inside the pupil frame image EF is displayed so as to be the iris of the pupil. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right in the display area of the hold icon 9A, and the leftmost pupil frame image The hold icon 9A is not displayed on the EF. Thereafter, the eyebrow represented by the pupil frame image EF is open, and the state in which the hold icon 9A is displayed is referred to as "open state", and the state in which the eyelid is closed and the hold icon 9A is not visible is also referred to as "closed state". . Here, the reserved icon 9C is also displayed in another pupil frame image different from the pupil frame image EF.

  At a specific timing during fluctuation, the closing effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is executed. Specifically, any pupil frame image of the pupil frame image EF (here, the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right among the four pupil frame images EF) in which the hold icon 9A is displayed In the EF, the image changes as the overhead image appears and the eyes are closed. Then, the hold icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in which the image changes so as to close the eyes becomes an image in a state in which the eyes are completely closed by eyelids (closed state). That is, the pupil frame image EF is an image in which the reserved icon 9A of the black eye part is completely hidden by the eyelid. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed in the pupil frame image EF is in the non-display state.

  Next, the opening game effect shown in FIG. 69 (D) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in a state in which the eye is completely closed by eyelids (closed eyelid state) changes the image so that the eyelids open again. When the closed state is changed to the open state, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the hold icon 9A changes (hold change). FIG. 69F shows a shift effect. After the finalized display of the decorative symbol, the reserved icons 9A displayed in each pupil frame image EF move one by one to the right pupil frame image EF. The hold icon 9A displayed in the rightmost pupil frame image EF moves to the pupil frame image for which the hold is displayed, and is displayed as a black-eye portion of the pupil frame image.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the pending icon non-display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed, When the back of the panel is displayed, the hold icon 9A disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the open eye state, and in the closed eye state, the hold icon 9A is not visible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the hold icon 9A is a panel The image PN is displayed overlapping a part of the surface of the panel. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the open position, the hold icon 9A overlaps the part (white eye portion) of the pupil frame image EF Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the panel image PN representing the front surface of the panel, and then the panel image PN is switched to the display on the back surface of the panel It is possible to execute the first effect that the holding icon 9A disappears. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the pupil frame image EF representing the open eye condition, and thereafter, the pupil frame image EF switches to the display of the closed eyelid state, and the hold icon 9A disappears. Can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the first effect that the holding icon 9A disappears, the panel image PN switches from the back surface of the panel to the display on the front surface, and the holding is lost. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the icon 9A is displayed again. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69, after the first effect that the holding icon 9A disappears, the pupil frame image EF switches from the closed state to the open state display, and the hidden icon 9A which is not visible is displayed again It is possible to execute the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, when the hidden icon 9A which disappears is displayed again, there is an effect that the status changes from the state before the hidden icon 9A disappears (hold change). To be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, each display area of the reserve icon 9A is divided by the frame area image HA. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding icon non-display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the frame area image HA is not displayed in FIG. 69, the frame area image HA may be displayed. Also, the shutter may be opened and closed instead of the bag.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the pending icon non-display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. In addition, the pending icon non-display effects A to C may not have a part of the effect content shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, and other effect content may be added. Moreover, pending icon non-display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 67 to 69 and may be any location or moving direction with regard to the position and the moving direction of the decorative symbol and the pending icon.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
One of the first display and the second display can be displayed in the respective display area in which each hold icon is displayed,
The hold icon can be displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed,
In the display area in which the second display is displayed, the hold icon disappears.
[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
When the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the first display. .
[Aspect B 4-3]
A game machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
The display of the display area is switched from the first display to the second display after the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, and the hold icon is not visible. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the effect of 1.
[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the display of the display area is switched from the second display to the first display, and the hidden icon which has disappeared can be displayed again. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
In the second effect, an effect of changing from a state before the hidden icon to be displayed again is executed is executed.
[Aspect B4-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes B4-1 to B4-5, wherein
Each of the display areas is divided by a frame image.

  The operation count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. The operation count effect is performed in parallel with the change effect of the decorative symbol. Of course, including during production such as during reach production (super reach production).

[Operation count effect A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect A.
First, in the operation count effect A, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), a sword movement effect is performed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG indicating the sword member 64 appears from the upper side to the right of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect is stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. Then, the display of the countdown is performed in the order of “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), a count effect (end period) is performed. In the count effect (end period), “0” is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following “1” of the display of the countdown described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70F, a button depression instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (success)]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the operation count effect B (success).
First, in the operation count effect B (success), as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a sword movement effect is performed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG indicating the sword member 64 appears from the upper side to the right of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71C, the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect rotates clockwise and moves leftward to stop at the lower left corner of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, the display of the countdown is performed on the portion of the button image BG in the order of “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”. Further, at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), a count effect (end period) is performed. In the count effect (end period), “0” is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following “1” of the display of the countdown described above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71F, a button depression instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (failure)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the operation count effect B (failure).
First, in the operation count effect B (failure), as shown in FIG. 72A, the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a sword movement effect is performed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG indicating the sword member 64 appears from the upper side to the right of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect rotates clockwise and moves leftward to stop at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, the display of the countdown is performed on the portion of the button image BG in the order of “5” → “4”. Further, at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Note that the effects of FIGS. 72A to 72D are the same as the operation count effect B (success) shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), a count effect (middle term) is performed. In the count effect (middle term), "3" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following "4" of the display of the countdown mentioned above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the fluctuation continuation effect is executed. In the fluctuation continuation effect, the display of the sword image KG is lost, and the same effect as the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 72 (A) is obtained. That is, the countdown display is interrupted at "3", and the same effect as the fluctuation start effect is performed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, the display of the countdown is performed using a part of the sword image KG indicating the sword member 64. When the display of the countdown becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 70 (E) and FIG. 71 (E), the button depression instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, by performing the countdown display using a part of the sword image KG, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the display of the countdown is performed superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG. When the display of the countdown becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the button depression instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, by counting down on the button image BG, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the countdown is displayed superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG, and “Wait ...” is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the countdown display superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG disappears on the way, the fluctuation continuation effect as shown in FIG. 72 (E) Is performed, and the button pressing instruction effect as shown in FIG. 71E is not performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the game a breadth and improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect rotates clockwise and moves leftward to stop at the lower left corner of the screen. According to this configuration, the player can be given unexpectedness, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, the display of the countdown is performed using a part of the sword image KG indicating the sword member 64. When the display of the countdown becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 70 (E) and FIG. 71 (E), the button depression instruction effect is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, even if the display of the countdown does not become "0", the button depression instruction effect may be performed.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the display of the countdown is performed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be counting up instead of counting down.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the display of the countdown is performed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the display does not have to be counting, and may be configured to display time such as "remaining 5 seconds" at a certain timing.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 5-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
A display unit capable of displaying an image of the operation unit;
A game machine characterized by displaying a time until the operation means becomes operable by using a part of the image of the operation means.
[Aspect B5-2]
A game machine characterized by superimposing on an image showing a movable part of the operation means and displaying a time until the operation means becomes operable.
[Aspect B5-3]
While displaying the time until the operation means becomes operable, another part of the image of the operation means is used to perform a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is suspended. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation means is not operable when the time display is terminated halfway.
[Aspect B5-5]
A game machine, wherein an image of the operation means is displayed in a corner portion of the display means when displaying the time until the operation means becomes operable.

  The timer image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. The timer image movement effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the timer image movement effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. It is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect A. In the timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 73 (A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps the first button image BI1, and slides in the left direction at a predetermined timing.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides to the left, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and a part thereof overlaps the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 73 (C) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides further to the left, the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the left. In addition, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of the light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, a second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed adjacent to each other, and partially overlap the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 73 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the wall image HA, a character image of “press!” For urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation Promotion image) A timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 73F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect B. In the timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 74 (A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the first button image BI1 is disposed on the stage image ST. The stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are deformed such that the stereoscopic image of the button and the stage is laterally rotated at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, this deformation of the image is also referred to as lateral rotation effect.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 74 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST in accordance with the lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 that appears from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, along with the resumption of the lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position. Along with the lateral rotation effect, a light emission effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light of a predetermined color, and after the start of the light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, a second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 that appears from the right side of the stage image ST is temporarily stopped at the first position with the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 temporarily stopped. . At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and respectively adjacent to the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image of “press !!” for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button An operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 74F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect C. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 75 (A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves in the left direction, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. In addition, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of the light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, a second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 75 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a is moved leftward and connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 was originally connected. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and respectively adjacent to the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 75 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of "Press!" For urging the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer image movement production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first effect that the first timer image TN1 is displayed in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, After the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 was displayed. And is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (B), 74 (B) and 75 (B), the first timer image TN1 at the time of displaying the first timer image is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 at the time of displaying the second timer image is the second timer image TN2. And adjacent. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 at the time of the second timer image display is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), FIG. 74 (C), and FIG. 75 (C), before the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position, A light emission effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation portion (here, the presentation button 63) of the gaming machine 1 There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer image movement presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, effects are formed by the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect using an image having an appearance of an operation unit different from the effect button 63. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect by using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit, instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 73 to 75 is a countdown method, it may be a count up method. The timer image TN may not be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, and other effect contents may be added. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 73 to 75 and may be any position or movement direction with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image,
In a state in which the first image is displayed on the display means, a first effect that the first timer image is displayed at a first position, and after the first effect, the first timer It is possible to execute a second effect in which an image is displayed at a second position and the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the first effect, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3, wherein
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-4, wherein
In the second effect, a predetermined effect using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 is further:
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
A game machine characterized in that the first image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.

  The timer image tilt display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. The timer image tilt display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the timer image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is a display effect to be displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image inclined display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect A. In the timer image inclined display effect A, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 76 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, at the lower right of the display screen 7a, the first timer image TN1 is displayed, and a fan-shaped area image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The area image SC is different in color from the other parts of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the lower right of the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves upward to the left along the fan-shaped area image SC, and is displayed obliquely as compared to when displayed at the first position. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 76 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves upward from the first position on the area image SC to the upper left, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. Be done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the area image SC, and is displayed with a tilt of approximately 90 degrees as compared to when displayed at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 76 (D) is executed. Specifically, as in the case of the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves upward and to the left along the area image SC, and is displayed more obliquely than when displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves downward to the left along the area image SC, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more as compared to when displayed at the first position. Further, when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds), the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 76 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of “press!” For urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation Promotion image) A timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 76F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Timer image inclined display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect B. In the timer image inclined display effect B, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 77 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is located above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation) at the first position. Thereby, the first timer image TN1 is displayed obliquely as compared with the state at the time of appearing on the display screen 7a. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 77 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the display of the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second timing near the center on the right side of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate to the left, and is displayed with a tilt of approximately 90 degrees at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 77 (D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 is rotated leftward (counterclockwise rotation) at the second position and is displayed obliquely as compared with the state at the time when it appears on the display screen 7a Be done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate left, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more as compared with the state at the time of appearing on the display screen 7a. Further, when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds), the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), a button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 77 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of “press!” For urging the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation Promotion image) A timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 77F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Timer image inclined display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. In the timer image inclined display effect C, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 78 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position (first position) adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves upward to the left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed obliquely as compared to when displayed at the first position. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, a second timer image display shown in FIG. 78C is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves upward from the first position along the first button image BI1 to the upper left, at a predetermined timing, the first position adjacent to the right of the first button image BI1 The second timer image TN2 is displayed on the screen. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1, and is displayed approximately 90 degrees more inclined than when displayed at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 78 (D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 is moved upward and to the left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed obliquely as compared to when displayed at the first position. Ru. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves downward to the left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more as compared to when displayed at the first position. Further, when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds), the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (e.g., "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 78 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in contact with the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of "press!" For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 78F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production design is stopped and displayed with the lost design.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer image inclination display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 (B), 77 (B) and 78 (B), the first timer is displayed with the first button image BI1 displayed on the display screen 7a. The first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1 is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, in the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effect shown in FIG. 76 (B), FIG. 77 (B) and FIG. 78 (B), FIG. 76 (C), FIG. 77 (C) and FIG. As shown to C), it is comprised so that execution of the 2nd presentation in which 1st timer image TN1 inclined by the angle different from the time of 1st presentation is displayed is possible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation unit (here, the presentation button 63) of the gaming machine 1 There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) and (E) and 78 (D) (E), when the countdown value displayed in the first timer image TN1 becomes a predetermined value. In addition, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer image inclination display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 to FIG. 78, effects are configured to be executable by the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect using an image having an appearance of an operation unit different from the effect button 63. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect by using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit, instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. Also by this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a fresh effect, and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 is a countdown method, it may be a count up method. In addition, the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Further, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIG. 76 to FIG. 78 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, and other effect contents may be added. Further, the timer image inclined display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 76 to 78 and may be any position or movement direction with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the holding icon.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
In the state where the first image is displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a first effect in which the timer image is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image. Machine.
[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-1,
In the first effect, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
It is possible to execute a second effect in which the timer image inclined at an angle different from that of the first effect is displayed after the first effect.
[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3 is further:
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
A game machine characterized in that the first image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect C2-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects C2-1 to C2-4, wherein
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes when the countdown value displayed on the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

  The timer button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. The timer button effect may be executed during variation effect of the decorative symbol (during one variation effect) (for example, during reach effect (super reach effect)) or during a jackpot game.

[Timer button effect A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing the timer button effect A.
In timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), a first button display effect is executed. In this first button display effect, a button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3B and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C3B shown in FIG. 79 (B), “50 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the second button display effect is executed. In the second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image C3C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C3A is darkened and / or a state in which the button image C3A is on. It is. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image C3C, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The timer image C3B indicates that the timer value is “0 seconds”. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before it becomes "0 second". The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A when the valid operation period has passed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, a feature movable effect is executed. The feature moving effect is a effect in which the movable panel 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and disposed on the display screen 7a (a position to hide the display screen 7a). This feature movable effect functions as a chance up.

[Timer button effect B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect B.
In timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the first button display effect is executed as in FIG. 79 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3D and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down, and is arranged in the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (B), “30 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the second button display effect is executed. In the second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3D are displayed. The timer image C3D shows a timer value “0 seconds” in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before it becomes "0 second". The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A when the valid operation period has passed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, a retimer display effect is executed. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is performed again, that is, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. In this case, as in FIG. 80 (B), the timer image C3D is disposed in the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (D), “50 seconds” longer than the case of FIG. 80 (B) is shown as the timer initial value. This can suggest that the re-timer display effect has a high jackpot expectation.

  In the timer display effect in the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns of timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are prepared. For example, as the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds respectively as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, and the second pattern is based on the first pattern. It is set to long 70 seconds and 50 seconds respectively. In this case, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the second pattern is set than in the case where the first pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D. When displaying in the first pattern or displaying in the second pattern as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer button production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effects A and B, the timer image is displayed and after the timer image is displayed. In response to the timer value of the timer image becoming a predetermined value (0 second), a button image C3C is displayed that prompts the player to press the effect button 63. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, and can suppress the pressing timing of the effect button 63 from being missed. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game effect can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one change effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one time of the variable effect production, the player does not change the button image from the timer display without error It can be recognized, and it can be suppressed that the depression timing of the effect button 63 is missed. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game effect can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed, and after the timer image C3D is displayed, the timer image is displayed. In response to the C3D timer value becoming a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, A retimer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, and can suppress the pressing timing of the effect button 63 from being missed, and the timer display is displayed again after the effect button 63 is pressed. As it is executed, the player can be given a surprise. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play while improving the player's participation rate in the game effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed in the button image C3A. According to this configuration, the player can strongly predict the effect (button depression effect or the like) related to the effect button 63 by the timer display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer images C3B and C3D in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance up effect (a chance up display). According to this configuration, since the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer images C3B and C3D in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. . According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer button production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed by the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In addition, according to the pressing, the feature movable effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the button image C3C being displayed by the second button effect, the bonus item moving effect or the retimer display effect is executed. It is also good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer button effects A and B May be performed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effect shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. May be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-mentioned timeout display effect can be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer images C3B and C3D in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when timer initial values of timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in timer button effects A and B, the timer image is displayed in a first color (for example, blue), and a second color (for example, blue) For example, there is a case where it is displayed in golden color, and these functions as chance-up effects (chance-up display), respectively, in the case where the second color is set rather than the case where the first color is set. However, the jackpot may have a high expectation level.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed by the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In addition, according to the pressing, the feature movable effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the pseudo-sequence effect, the big hit notice effect, the reach development destination notice effect, the big hit expectation degree Effects such as suggestion effects, hold change notices, or preview start notices may be executed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
An operation unit operable by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a first timer display,
The third display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and is an effect for displaying a second operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value. Depending on the situation, the third display effect may be performed,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C3-2]
It is equipped with symbol display means capable of performing symbol fluctuation display to be stopped after starting fluctuation display of symbols,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed when the player operates the operation unit.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-1 or the aspect C3-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in an area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect includes the timer display of one of a plurality of modes including the timer display of the first mode and the timer display of the second mode. Done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance-up display,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, it functions as a second chance-up display having a higher jackpot expectation than the first chance-up display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value has a first length,
The timer indication of the second aspect of the first timer indication is a second length in which the initial value of the timer value is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5, characterized in that

  The timer pseudo-simultaneous effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. The timer pseudo-series effect may be performed during variation design of the decoration pattern (during one variation production), for example, at the start of variation of the decoration design, during reach production, or the like.

[Timer simulated series effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo-simulation effect A.
In the timer simulated series effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81A, a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C4A shown in FIG. 81 (A), “15 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), button depression effect A is executed. In button press effect A, a button image C4B and a timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image C4B is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C4D is darkened and / or a state in which the button image C4D is on. It is. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image C4B, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The timer image C4A indicates that the timer value is “0 seconds”. The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before it becomes "0 second". The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the valid operation period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the pseudo connected effect A is executed. In the simulated rendition A, a simulated rendition suggestion image C4C is displayed. The pseudo connected suggestion image C4C is an image reminiscent of a pseudo connected effect, and in detail, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the pseudo connected effect is the second time is shown. Also, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo series effect, a predetermined effect is performed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice or preview start notice are executed obtain.
In addition, the pseudo-series effect is an effect executed at the start of change deformation or during reach effect, etc. For example, an effect which repeats the effect of starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and temporarily stopping it, a predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol Along with an effect that repeats at least a part of temporary stop, a effect that repeats a temporary stop of a predetermined logo, or a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “x 2”, “x 3”, “pseudo” It includes an effect of executing a change effect of a decorative symbol.

[Timer simulated series effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo-simultaneous effect B.
In the timer simulated series effect B, first, the timer button display effect A is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). In the timer button display effect A, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. The timer image C4A is the same as the timer image C4A of FIG. 81 (A), the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and “15 seconds” is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), button depression effect A is executed as in FIG. 81 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the pseudo-sequence effect A is executed as in FIG. 81 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), timer button display effect B is executed. In the timer button display effect B, in the timer button display effect B, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is the same as the button image C4D of FIG. The timer image C4A shows "30 seconds" as an initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), a button depression effect B is executed as in FIG. 82 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), the pseudo connected effect B is executed. In the simulated rendition B, a simulated rendition suggestion image C4E is displayed. The pseudo connected suggestion image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo connected effect, and in detail, “pseudo x 3” indicating that the pseudo connected effect is the third time is shown. Also, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo-series effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice or preview start notice are executed obtain.

  Note that, in the timer display effect in the above-described timer simulated series effects A and B, a plurality of patterns of timer initial values of the timer image C4A are prepared. For example, as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds as shown in FIG. 82, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds longer than the first pattern. In this case, in the timer display effect, the probability that the timer pseudo-simulated effect B is obtained when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A than when the first pattern is set. That is, after the pseudo-series effect, the probability that the pseudo-series effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again is high. When displaying in the first pattern or displaying in the second pattern as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a timer pseudo-series effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo-series effects A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In response to the button image, a button image C4B is displayed that prompts the player to press the effect button 63, and in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, the pseudo-series effect is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a feeling of surprise rather than merely performing pseudo-series effects, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-series effect B, a button image C4D and a timer image C4A suggesting that a button effect using the effect button 63 is performed from now are displayed, In response to the timer value of the timer image C4A reaching a predetermined value (0 second), a button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the player presses the effect button 63. In accordance with the pseudo series effect is executed. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, it is possible to foresee the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and it is possible to give a sense of excitement to the progress of the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer simulated series effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one time of the variable effect production, the player can recognize the change of the button image without error from the timer display, and the effect is produced. Missing pressing timing of the button 63 can be suppressed. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game effect can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-series effect B, after the execution of the pseudo series effect A, the timer button display effect is executed again (see FIG. 82 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to give a sense of anticipation that the simulated rendition will be realized again, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-series effect A, B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer image C4A in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern. Each serves as a chance up effect (a chance up display). According to this configuration, since the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-series effect A, B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer image C4A in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern. Each function as a chance up effect (chance up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-simultaneous effect B is obtained when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-series effect, the probability that the pseudo-series effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again is high. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer pseudo-series effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the button image C4B is displayed by the button depression effect in the timer pseudo-series effect A, B, and the effect button 63 is depressed by the player And although the pseudo-series effect is executed according to the pressing, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the button image C4B being displayed as the button pressed effect, the pseudo-series effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo associated effects A and B are executed during one time of the variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer pseudo associated effects A , B may be performed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-mentioned timeout display effect can be performed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-series effect A, B may be displayed as the first pattern of the timer image C4A in the first pattern or may be displayed in the second pattern. Each function as a chance up effect (chance up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-simultaneous effect B is obtained when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, Although the probability that the pseudo series effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again is high after the pseudo series effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer simulated sequential effects A and B, the second color (e.g., the first color) (e.g., blue) and the second color (e.g., the second color) , And may be displayed in golden color, and these function as chance-up effects (chance-up display), respectively, in the case where the second color is set rather than the case where the first color is set. The probability of becoming the timer pseudo connected effect B, that is, the probability that the pseudo connected effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again after the pseudo connected effect may be high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo-sequence effects A and B shown in FIG. 81 to FIG. 82, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two The above timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit operable by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first timer display,
The second display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and is an effect for displaying a first operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit.
The third display effect is a pseudo-sequence effect,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed in response to the timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect becoming a predetermined value. The third display effect may be performed in response to the player operating the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C4-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C4-3]
It is equipped with symbol display means capable of performing symbol fluctuation display to be stopped after starting fluctuation display of symbols,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C4-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect may be performed after the third display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect is a timer display of one of a plurality of timer displays including a timer display of a first mode and a timer display of a second mode. Done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance-up display,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. Function as a second chance-up indication, where the expected degree is higher than the first chance-up indication,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, characterized in that
[Aspect C4-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value has a first length,
The timer indication of the second aspect of the timer indication is a second length in which the initial value of the timer value is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5, characterized in that

  The pending change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. The hold change effect is performed in parallel with the change effect of the decorative symbol. Of course, it includes running such as reach production (super reach production).

[Pending change effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect A. The pending change effect A is executed as one of the pre-read effects. That is, it is performed as one mode of the prefetching effect patterns A and B described above. The pending change effect A has two modes based on the pre-read effect pattern.

  First, in the pending change effect A, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, a reserve image 9A and a reserve digest image 9C are displayed.

  As one mode following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 described as "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed such that the change image CG1 is sucked into the hold image HGW which is one of the hold images 9A. The hold image HGW is displayed in white. The hold image HGW corresponds to the target hold of the pre-reading effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the on-hold change effect (1) is performed. In the holding change effect (1), the white holding image HGW changes to a blue holding image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

  On the other hand, as another mode following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 described as "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83F, a change movement effect (2) is performed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed such that the change image CG2 is sucked into the hold image HGW which is one of the hold images 9A. The hold image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the on-hold change effect (2) is performed. In the holding change presentation (2), the white holding image HGW changes to a red holding image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Pending change effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect B. The pending change effect B is executed as one of the pre-read effects. That is, it is performed as one mode of the prefetching effect patterns A and B described above.

  First, in the pending change effect B, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, a reserve image 9A and a reserve digest image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 described as "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed such that the change image CG1 is sucked into the hold image HGW which is one of the hold images 9A. The hold image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the on-hold change effect (1) is performed. In the holding change effect (1), the white holding image HGW changes to a blue holding image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), similarly to FIG. 84 (B), the change display effect (1) in which the change image CG1 is displayed is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the change movement effect (1) is executed as in FIG. 84 (C), and the effect that the change image CG1 is sucked into the hold image HGB changed from the hold image HGW Is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the on-hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change presentation (2), the blue hold image HGB is changed to red and further to a hold image HGR.

[Pending change production C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect C. The pending change effect C is executed as one of the pre-read effects. That is, it is performed as one mode of the prefetching effect patterns A and B described above.

  First, in the pending change effect C, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, a reserve image 9A and a reserve digest image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button depression promotion effect is executed. In the button depression promotion effect, a button image BB indicating the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a text image TG of “continuous hit!” Is displayed together with the button image BB. As a result, the player is urged to hit the effect button 63 continuously.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 described as "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, the button depression promoting effect is also performed in parallel.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 described as "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red. At this time, the button depression promoting effect is also performed in parallel.

  That is, when the player continuously presses the effect button 63 by executing the button depression promotion effect, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85E, the change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed such that the change image CG2 is sucked into the hold image HGW which is one of the hold images 9A. The hold image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85F, the on-hold change effect (2) is performed. In the holding change presentation (2), the white holding image HGW changes to a red holding image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image marked as "Change" is displayed as the change display effect. The hold image HGW is changed corresponding to the change image. According to this configuration, the change image can be expected to change the reserved image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the white reserved image HGW is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (C) and FIG. 83 (D). Is changed to the blue reserved image HGB. Further, when the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (E), as shown in FIGS. 83 (F) and 83 (G), the white reserved image HGW is changed to the red reserved image HGR. Be changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect changes to the reserve images HGB and HGR by the displayed change images CG1 and CG2, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the white reserved image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D). Is changed to the blue reserved image HGB. Further, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 84E, as shown in FIGS. 84F and 84G, the blue reserve image HGB is a red reserve image HGR. Be changed to According to this configuration, it is possible to expect change to the reserve image HGR by displaying the change image CG1 again, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 (C), (F), 84 (C), (F), and FIG. 85 (E), change movement effect is performed. In the change movement effect, in the change movement effect, an effect is performed such that the change image is sucked into the hold image which is one of the hold images 9A, and the hold image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a change in the reserved image, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button depression promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to make a continuous hit of the effect button 63. Then, the player continuously presses the effect button 63, whereby the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D). According to this configuration, since the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by the operation of the effect button 63, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image marked as "Change" is displayed as the change display effect. The hold image HGW is changed corresponding to the change image. Here, the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), it changes to the blue reserved image HGB, and as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the red change image When CG2 is displayed, it changes to a red reserved image HGR. That is, the change image and the reserved image after the change correspond one to one. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one hold image, and one change image may correspond to two or more types of hold images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button depression promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to make a continuous hit of the effect button 63. Then, the player continuously presses the effect button 63, whereby the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D). On the other hand, the change display effect shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D) may be performed without operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button depression promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to make a continuous hit of the effect button 63. Then, the player continuously presses the effect button 63, whereby the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D). On the other hand, when the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effect shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D) is not performed, and FIG. 85 (F) is continued from FIG. The on-hold change presentation as shown may be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button depression promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to make a continuous hit of the effect button 63. Then, the player continuously presses the effect button 63, whereby the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (C) and FIG. 85 (D). As another mode for this, when the presentation button 63 is continuously hit, a presentation may not be made to shift display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 85 (D). In this case, it is conceivable to execute the change movement effect (1) and the hold change effect (1) in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D).

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
Display means capable of notifying of the number of holdings by the number of displayed holding images;
A gaming machine comprising rendering means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The effect means can display a plurality of change notice images for giving notice of a change in the hold image,
A game machine characterized by changing the hold image in correspondence with the plurality of change notice images.

[Aspect C5-2]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the second change notice image is displayed, the hold image is displayed. A game machine characterized by changing to a second hold image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the hold image is held A game machine characterized by changing an image into a second hold image.

[Aspect C5-4]
A game machine characterized in that the displayed change preview image acts on one of the hold images, and then changes the hold image.

[Aspect C5-5]
The player further comprises operation means operable by the player;
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of change notice images are displayed after the operation of the operation means.

  The acquired ball number display effect will be described using FIG. The acquired ball number display effect may be executed during a special game such as a big hit game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 can be displayed as one of the round game effects that the round control command is received from the sub control board 90 and executed.

[Acquired ball number display effect]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an acquired ball number display effect. In the winning ball display effect, first, the winning image display of FIG. 86 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball winning the first large winning opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71 which is "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). It is executed when at least a part of the game balls after that passes the V area 39. Here, a V winning image WP is displayed indicating that the gaming ball has passed the V area 39. Since the V prize image WP is an image that suggests that the high probability time state will be short, the V prize image WP can be said to be an image that indicates that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 86A, character image CRA1 is displayed in the state where V prize image WP is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the currently obtainable ball number display CGN is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a measure of the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the next round of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71, the currently obtainable ball number display CGN is displayed as a measure of the obtainable ball number in the round game. Note that, in FIG. 86 (B), a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state in which the currently obtainable sphere number display CGN is displayed. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images indicating that the game ball should be fired in the right direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86C, the currently acquired number-of-balls display AAN is displayed. The currently acquired ball number is the number of balls already acquired in the corresponding game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to the start of the round game is displayed as a currently acquired ball number display AAN. In FIG. 86C, a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state where the currently acquired number-of-balls display AAN is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the currently acquired sphere number display AAN and the estimated cumulative acquisition sphere number display TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative acquisition number of balls is the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the planned cumulative earned number of balls display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently obtained number of balls displayed AAN. In FIG. 86 (D), the planned cumulative acquisition number-of-balls display TPN and the current acquisition number-of-balls display AAN are displayed vertically adjacent to each other, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are displayed together.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the number display effect of acquisition ball number is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86C, the currently acquired number of balls AAN is displayed in the state where the plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously give the player the feeling of excitement by knowing the number of balls already acquired in the jackpot game and the sense of expectation that can be further acquired by the right-handed display, thereby improving the interest. Can be

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the planned cumulative earned ball number display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently obtained ball number AAN during the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the number of currently acquired balls approaches the planned accumulated number of acquired balls, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the currently obtainable ball number display CGN is displayed at the start of the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement by knowing the number of balls obtainable in the current round, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the V pay image WP shown in FIG. 86 (A) is displayed before the currently obtainable ball number display CGN shown in FIG. 86 (B) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the currently obtainable ball number display CGN. According to this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously add the feeling of excitement by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in the current round and the expectation that it will be realized by right-handing by right-handling, thereby improving the curiosity be able to.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the acquisition ball number display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), an effect exemplarily showing the V winning image is shown as an image suggesting that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. However, instead of the V prize image, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image other than the V prize image which suggests that the gaming state is advantageous to the player later. Examples of images other than the V prize image suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later include, for example, an image indicating that the jackpot game is to be started and an image indicating that the small hit game is to be started, etc. It is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) and 86 (C), two right-handed images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. Further, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images different in size from one another. Also, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 86 (D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball number display effect may be executed in a special game other than the jackpot game. For example, it may be executed during a small hit game.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image indicating that the gaming ball should be fired in a predetermined direction,
In a state where a plurality of the first images are displayed during the winning game, it is possible to execute a first effect in which the currently obtained number of balls representing the number of balls already obtained in the winning game is displayed. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying a planned accumulated earned ball number representing the planned number of balls to be acquired at the end of the current round adjacent to the display of the current acquired ball number during the round game. Gaming machine.
[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2, wherein
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect in which a currently obtainable ball number indicating the number of balls obtainable in the current round is displayed at the start of the round game.
[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image which suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later,
It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the second image is displayed on the display unit before the third effect is executed.
[Aspect D1-5]
A game machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4, wherein
In the third effect, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of currently obtainable balls.

  The payout display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout display effect may be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol in a probability change state or a time reduction state (for example, the end of the reach effect (before the start of the big hit game)) or during the big hit game.

[Delivery display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for describing the payout display effect A.
In payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game (hereinafter, also referred to as the jackpot game) based on the jackpot after notification of the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as the jackpot) or during the jackpot game The planned number-of-outballs suggestion image D2A is displayed. The payout scheduled payout number suggesting image D2A is an image indicating the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the scheduled payout number of balls). It is indicated that 800 balls are scheduled to be paid out in the scheduled delivery number of balls suggested image D2A in FIG. 87 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. The accumulated payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and a cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggesting image D2B is displayed. The cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggesting image D2B is a jackpot that is won before the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots (hereinafter, also referred to as consecutive chan middle jackpots) during the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as consecutive jack middle past jackpots) It is an image that suggests the number of balls (hereinafter also referred to as a cumulative payout scheduled ball count) obtained by adding the scheduled payout ball count to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on. In other words, the cumulative payout scheduled ball number indication image D2B indicates the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game based on the consecutive Chan middle jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87C, a cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout additional display effect, a cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggestion image D2B and a cumulative payout ball number suggest image D2C are displayed. Cumulative payout balls number suggested image D2C is a ball obtained by adding the number of payout balls, which is the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game, to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the consecutive jackpot It is an image that suggests a number (hereinafter also referred to as a cumulative payout ball number). In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C indicates the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game based on the consecutive Chan middle jackpot. In FIG. 87 (C), the cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggestion image D2B is disposed under the cumulative payout number of balls suggesting image D2C, and is between the cumulative payout scheduled number of balls suggesting image D2B and the cumulative payout number of balls suggesting image D2C. Is a slash (line). That is, the cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggesting image D2B is disposed at the position of the denominator, and the cumulative payout number of balls suggesting image D2C is disposed at the position of the numerator, and is represented in the form of "cumulative payout number of balls / cumulative scheduled payout number of balls". .

  The payout display effect A is executed in the case of a jackpot to shift to a time-shortened definite variation state, and is not performed in the case of a jackpot to shift to a time-shortened non-deterministic variation state. Not limited to this, the payout display effect A may be executed even when a jackpot that does not shift to a non-probable state with time saving.

[Delivery display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for describing the payout display effect B.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the payout schedule display effect is executed as in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), a cumulative payout scheduled display effect is executed. The cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggested image D2B, the jackpot relevant ball number related image D2E, and the number-of-continuous-times suggested The image D2D is displayed. The payout ball number related image D2E indicates the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the number of payout balls) and the number of planned payout balls. In FIG. 88 (B), the display of the planned number of balls to be paid out is disposed on the right side of the display of the number of balls to be paid out, and a slash () between the display of the number of balls to be paid out and the display of the number of planned balls to be paid out. Line is shown. That is, the display of the scheduled payout number is arranged at the position of the denominator, and the display of the payout number is arranged at the location of the denominator, and is expressed in the form of “the number of payout balls / the number of scheduled payout balls”. The number of consecutive chances suggested image D2D is an image that indicates the number of consecutive big hits in a row, that is, the number of consecutive big hits in a row.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, a cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. The accumulated payout additional display effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the number-of-disbursed-balls related image D2E, the number of times of consecutive churn suggestion image D2D, and the number-of-cumulatively distributed balls related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number related image D2F indicates the cumulative payout ball number and the cumulative payout planned ball number. In FIG. 88 (C), the display of the cumulative payout scheduled ball number is disposed on the right side of the display of the cumulative payout ball number, and between the display of the cumulative payout ball number and the display of the cumulative payout scheduled ball number, Line is shown. That is, the display of the cumulative payout planned number of balls is arranged at the position of the denominator, and the display of the cumulative payout number of balls is arranged at the position of the denominator, and is represented in the form of "cumulative payout number of balls / cumulative planned payout number of balls".

  In the payout display effects A and B, as described above, the payout schedule display production is executed during the late stage of the fluctuation production (reach production) (before the start of the big hit game) or during the big hit game, and the cumulative pay schedule display effect Is executed during the late stage of the change effect (reach effect) (before the start of the big hit game) or during the big hit game, and the cumulative payout additional display effect may be carried out during the big hit game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect is performed before the start of the big hit game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect and the cumulative payout additional display effect are performed during the big hit game.

  The payout display effect B is executed in the case of a jackpot transitioning to a time-shortened definite variation state, and is not performed in the case of a jackpot transitioning to a time-shortened non-deterministic variation state. Not limited to this, the payout display effect B may be executed even at the time of a big hit that does not shift to the non-probable variable state with time saving.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of payment display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout expected ball number suggested image D2A is displayed in the payout display effect, and the cumulative payout display effect Then, the cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player can grasp the cumulative payout scheduled number of balls in the consecutive chan in addition to the scheduled payout number of balls in the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the gaming will of the player. . As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 88, in the payout display effects A and B, when the display of the cumulative payout expected number of balls is being performed by the cumulative payout additional display effect, The display of the number of payout balls is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play until the cumulative payout planned number of balls is reached. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the payout display effect B, when the cumulative payout scheduled ball number is being displayed by the cumulative payout schedule display effect or the cumulative payout additional display effect, The display of the said number of payout balls is performed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of payout balls and can improve the player's willingness to play until the cumulative payout number of balls is reached. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the display of the cumulative payout scheduled ball number is performed in the payout display effect C, the suggestion of the number of times of running continuously is performed. According to this configuration, since it is possible to associate the average number of dispensed balls (average number of dispensed balls) in one big hit game from the relationship between the cumulative number of distributed planned balls and the number of consecutive moves, when the average number of distributed balls is large The player can feel a sense of well-being, and if the average number of payout balls is small, the player's willingness to play can be improved in order to extend the continuous game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a payout display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cumulative payout additional display effect may not be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the display indicating the cumulative payout expected number of balls is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, when the gaming state after the jackpot is not the probability variation gaming state, the display indicating the cumulative payout scheduled ball number may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 88, the payout display effects A and B are executed in the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the order of these may be changed. For example, the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout additional display effect, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect may be used, or the cumulative payout schedule display effect, the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect may be performed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout planned number of balls is determined based on the jackpot in the consecutive chan, but the present invention Is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative payout scheduled balls number is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots from that morning on the jackpot that was won before the jackpot (cumulative payout balls number on the day), It is good also as the number of balls which added the number of balls scheduled to be paid out (the number of balls scheduled to be cumulatively distributed on the day). In this case, the cumulative payout number of balls may also be displayed on the day.
In addition, the number of accumulated payout planned balls is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot which is won before the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots from a certain timing (predetermined timing accumulated payout ball number), The number of balls to which the predetermined number of balls to be paid out is added may be set as the number of balls (predetermined number of scheduled cumulative payout number of balls). In this case, the predetermined timing accumulated payout number of balls may also be displayed. Note that the gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine "a certain timing". As a result, the player can arbitrarily set "a certain timing".

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D2-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
Determining means for determining whether or not a big hit is made by lottery;
In the case of a jackpot, a jackpot execution means capable of executing a jackpot game of paying out game media to the player,
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect that displays a payout schedule indicating the number of scheduled payouts, which is the number of gaming media scheduled to be paid out in the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot,
The first jackpot is a jackpot during a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The second display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot, the number of game media for the first jackpot game This is an effect that displays the cumulative payout schedule display that represents the cumulative payout schedule number including the scheduled payout number.
The second jackpot is a jackpot which is won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot during the second gaming state,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect D2-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game is a game already paid out during the first jackpot game It is an effect that the cumulative payout display showing the cumulative payout number with the number of media added,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the third display effect may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1, characterized in that
[Aspect D2-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect to be performed during the first jackpot game, and to perform the jackpot payout display representing the number of game media already paid out during the first jackpot game,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2.
[Aspect D2-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect to be performed during the first jackpot game, and to display the number of consecutive jackpots representing the number of consecutive jackpots,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3, characterized in that
[Aspect D2-5]
If the first jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the first jackpot game is a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, the combination effect is not executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4, characterized in that

  The winning image / character image superposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. The winning image / character image superimposing effect may be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 can be displayed as one of the round game effects that the round control command is received from the sub control board 90 and executed.

[Prize image / Character image superposition effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining a winning image / character image superposition effect A. In the winning image / character image superimposing effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 89 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball winning the first large winning opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71 which is "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). It is executed when at least a part of the game balls after that passes the V area 39. Here, a V winning image WP is displayed indicating that the gaming ball has passed the V area 39. Since the V prize image WP is an image that suggests that the high probability time state will be short, the V prize image WP can be said to be an image that indicates that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 89 (A), the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves in the left direction. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the V winning image WP. As described above, in the present specification, “overlap of images” means that the images appear to overlap from the player's point of view, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, when at least a part of the V prize image WP displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing by the first character image AN1, it can be said that the images overlap.

  The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image / character image superposition display shown in FIG. 89 (B) is performed. Specifically, an image in which the first character image AN1 is overlapped with a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In other words, an image showing a state in which the first character image AN1 is positioned in front of a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. Even when the first character images AN1 overlap, a part of the V prize image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 89 (B), a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves in the left direction following the first character image AN1.

  As the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 both move in the left direction, the winning image / character image superposition display shown in FIG. 89 (C) is executed. Specifically, an image in which both of the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 overlap with a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In FIG. 89C, a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

  As the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 further move in the left direction, the winning image / character image superposition display shown in FIG. 89D is executed. Specifically, an image in which only the second character image AN2 is overlapped with a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In other words, the V winning image WP in a state where the first character images AN1 do not overlap is displayed. The first character image AN1 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, by moving the second character image AN2 further to the left, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the winning image and the character image are in a non-overlapping state. Specifically, the V winning image WP in a state where the character images (the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2) are not overlapped is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89F, the second character image AN2 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Prize image / Character image superposition effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for describing a winning image / character image superposition effect B.
The winning image / character image superimposing effect B is different from the superposing effect A in FIG. 89 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The V prize image WP of the superimposition effect B changes in shape so as to indicate that the figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman character "V" is laterally rotated. First, in FIG. 90 (A), the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves in the left direction. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the V winning image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V prize image WP while the shape of the V prize image WP changes in comparison with FIG. 90 (A). The image of is displayed. V-prize image WP has a shape representing a state in which a figure representing a three-dimensional shape is more laterally oriented than FIG. 90 (A). Even if the first character images AN1 overlap, part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In FIG. 90 (B), a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves in the left direction following the first character image AN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), while the shape of the V prize image WP changes in comparison with FIG. 90 (B), the first character image AN1 and the second character are displayed on a part of the V prize image WP. An image in which both of the image AN2 overlap is displayed. In FIG. 90 (C), a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), only the second character image AN2 overlapped with a part of the V prize image WP while the shape of the V prize image WP was changed as compared with FIG. 90 (C). An image of the state is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 90E, the V prize image WP in a state in which the character images do not overlap is displayed while the shape of the V prize image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90D. Thereafter, in FIG. 90 (F), while the shape of the V winning image WP changes in comparison with FIG. 90 (E), the V winning image WP in a state in which the character images are not overlapped is displayed.

[Prize image / Character image superposition effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining a winning image / character image superposition effect C.
The winning image / character image superimposing effect C is different from the superposing effect B in FIG. 90 in the display method of the character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C does not move to the left and right of the display screen 7a and intersects with the V prize image WP, but the shape changes in accordance with the change in the shape of the V prize image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C is disposed on one surface of the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP, and is rotated together when the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP is laterally rotated. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), an image in a state where the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V prize image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state in which the character image AN1 is positioned on a part of the front surface of the V prize image WP is displayed. Even if the first character images AN1 overlap, part of the V prize image WP is displayed. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the V winning image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change as compared with FIG. 91 (A). Specifically, an image is displayed which shows a state in which the three-dimensional shape in which the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 are combined is more oriented in the lateral direction than in FIG. Also in this state, it is an image in a state where the character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V prize image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), an image is displayed showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is more in the lateral direction than in FIG. 91 (B). Here, the three-dimensional shape in which the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 are combined is facing sideways, and the V prize image WP in a state in which the character image AN1 is not overlapped is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. 91 (C), and of the three dimensional shapes of the V prize image WP, An image in which the other surface side where the character image AN1 is not arranged can be seen is displayed. The character image AN1 is not visible due to the V prize image WP, and the V prize image WP in a state in which the character image AN1 is not overlapped is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. 91 (D), and of the three-dimensional shapes of the V prize image WP, An image is displayed in which the other surface on which the character image AN1 is not placed is in front. Although a part of the character image AN1 can be seen from between the V prize images WP, the V prize images WP in a state in which the character images AN1 are not overlapped are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91F, the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. 91E, and again the character image AN1 is changed by the V prize image WP. The V prize image WP in a state in which the character image AN1 is not overlapped is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a prize image / character image superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, at least a portion of the V pay image WP as shown in FIGS. 89 (B)-(D), 90 (B)-(D) and 91 (A) (B). An image in which the character image is superimposed on the image is displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 89 (A), (E), (F), FIGS. 90 (A), (E), (F), and FIGS. An image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V-prize image WP, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to (D), 90 (B) to 90 (D), 91 (A) and (B), a part of the V prize image WP is Even when an image in a state in which the character images overlap is displayed, another part of the V prize image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to show the player a part of the V prize image WP even in the state where the character image overlaps with a part of the V prize image WP. I can be convinced and I can improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90 (A), (B), (D) to (F), and 91 (A), (B), (D) to (F) An image in which the right-handed image is overlapped with a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located at the back of the right-handed image, a sense of depth can be produced on the display, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the V prize image WP changes in shape so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure of Roman character "V" is rotating. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located at the back of the right-handed image, a sense of depth can be produced on the display, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, effects are produced in a state where the character image overlaps the V prize image WP or a state where the character image does not overlap. According to this configuration, since the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V-prize image WP, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a prize image / character image superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, even when the V prize image WP is covered by the character image, a part of the V prize image WP is visible. However, the entire V prize image WP may be covered by the character image, and the V prize image WP may not be visible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image / character image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the winning image / character image superimposing effects A to C may not have a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, and other effect contents may be added. Further, the winning image and character image superimposing effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 89 to 91 and may be any position or movement direction with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decoration pattern, and the holding icon. .

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image that suggests that the gaming state is advantageous to the player later,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first display in which an image in a state in which the second image is overlapped with at least a part of the first image is displayed, and a first image in a state in which the second image is not overlapped is displayed A game machine capable of executing a second display.
[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the first display, a part of the first image is displayed without overlapping the second image.
[Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image indicating a right strike,
In the first display, an image in a state where the third image is overlapped with a part of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3,
A game machine characterized in that the shape of the first image changes so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
[Aspect D3-5]
A game machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the first image is a V prize image.

  The meter image effect in the button image will be described with reference to FIGS. This meter image production in the button image is executed during the fluctuation production of the decoration symbol (during one fluctuation production) (for example, at the start of the fluctuation of the decoration symbol, during the reach production (super reach production)) or during the jackpot game etc. It can be done.

[In-button meter effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing meter effect A in a button image.
In the in-button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E1A and a meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. The meter image E1B is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E1B is disposed sideways in the button image E1A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), a point provision effect is executed. In this point provision effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point provision effect may be performed multiple times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image indicating that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. The point acquisition image E1C in FIG. 92B indicates that the player has been given 3 points (3P) to the player (the player has acquired 3 points). Further, in the meter image E1B disposed in the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area is enlarged by the point being given, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E1B rises each time the point provision effect is performed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This point grant production, reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, hold change notice, pre-reading production, hold expectation degree suggestion production, or false It may be started in response to the execution of various effects such as a series effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92C, chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a chance-up image E1D are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged, and it is shown that the meter value is maximum (MAX. Also, the chance-up image E1D is an image that suggests a chance-up. The chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value is maximum (MAX) .The chance-up image E1D in FIG. And the word “expected degree 50%” indicating that the jackpot expected degree is about 50%, and the chance-up image E1D is a button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed adjacent to each other.

[In-button meter effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for describing meter effect B in the button image.
In the in-button image meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a button meter display effect is executed as in FIG. 92 (A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the point provision effect is executed as in FIG. 92 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93C, a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a timer image E1E are displayed. In the meter image E1B disposed in the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged, and it is represented that the meter value is maximized (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 50 seconds is set as an initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93D, a button depression effect is executed. In this button depression effect, a button image E1F and a timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E1F is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E1A was, is expressed as “PUSH” in the image, and the color of the button image E1A is darkened, and / or, It is an image showing a state as if the button image E1A is on. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E1F, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The timer image E1E indicates that the timer value has become “0 seconds”. The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E has become “0 seconds”. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before it becomes "0 second". The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the valid operation period. Note that the meter image E1B may be displayed in the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may indicate the maximum (MAX) or may return to the initial value (without the meter region).

  After the button depression effect, when the effect button 63 is depressed by the player within the effective operation period by the button depression effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice or preview start notice are executed obtain.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of meter production in a button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter image E1B is displayed when the button image E1A is displayed. The meter image E1B is disposed in the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (such as a chance-up effect) is performed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in association with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and the other effect is not the button effect in relation to the meter display. If done, the player can be given a feeling of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, point imparting effects are performed when the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. When the point acquisition image E1C is displayed and a predetermined point is given in the point provision effect, the meter area is enlarged by the point given in the meter image E1B, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. Ru. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image disposed in the button image is increased by the point application, it is possible to emphasize the increase in the meter value due to the point acquisition. In addition, when the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image rises by the point addition and reaches a predetermined value (maximum value) and develops to the button effect using the effect button 63, the player hits the jackpot It is possible to give great expectations to As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for the development of button effects using the effect button 63, and further, a feeling of expectation for the jackpot in the case of development into button effects. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the meter image effect B for the button image, the timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value becomes maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes a predetermined value, the player is expected to have a sense of expectation for the development of the button effect using the effect button 63, and further, the jackpot in the case of developing into the button effect It can give a sense of expectation to As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes “0 seconds”, the effect is presented to the player in the button depression effect in the meter effect B in the button image. A button image E1F prompting the user to press the button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the button effect development using the effect button 63, and further, a stronger sense of expectation for the jackpot when the button effect is developed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect show that the meter value of the meter image E1B is maximum (MAX). When executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is compared to the case where the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). If you develop into a big jackpot you can increase your sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the meter effect production in a button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacent to each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be disposed in the button image E1A or a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed at a distant position.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by the provision of points, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases by the provision of points by the point provision effect. Good. In this case, when the meter value becomes a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92C or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93C may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by the provision of points, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by execution of a predetermined operation instead of the point application by the point application effect. In this case, when the meter value becomes a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93 (C) are executed. Note that "a predetermined action has been performed" means, for example, that a pseudo continuous action has been performed, that a hold icon has changed (that a hold change display has been made), and a predetermined chance-up effect is carried out. It includes what has been done, and success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be performed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is not the maximum value (MAX) but a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a quarter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed on the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the chance-up image E1D is displayed in the chance-up effect in the meter image effect A in the button image, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). You may return it to. After that, the point provision effect may be performed, and the effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button depression effect in the meter effect B in the button image, but the present invention is not limited thereto. There is no limitation, and a meter image E1B may be displayed. In this case, the meter image E1B may be disposed in the button image E1F. After that, the point provision effect may be performed, and the effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image in-image meter effects A and B are executed during one variation effect production, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in-button image in-meters The effects A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the timer image E1E is displayed in the countdown mode in which the timer value counts down in the meter effect B in the button image, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button depression effect can be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, one timer image is displayed in the meter image effect B in the button image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more The timer image of may be displayed simultaneously.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first of the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, the first display effect is performed. The second display effect is performed, and the meter is displayed in the first operation unit image of the first display effect in the second display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the second display effect. The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect to which a predetermined point is given,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. In the second display effect, the display of the meter from the second aspect to the third aspect different from the first aspect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2 characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-4]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display.
A game machine according to any one of modes E1-1 to E1-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E1-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect,
The fifth display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit when the timer value of the timer display becomes a predetermined value, and a second operation unit image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit. Is the effect that is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4, characterized in that
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, the time when the meter becomes the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter becomes the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, characterized in that

  Hereinafter, the display effect in the button image will be described using FIG. 94 to FIG. This button image display effect in the button image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect)) or during the jackpot game etc. It can be done.

[Display effect in button image A]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing display effect A in a button image.
In the in-button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E2A and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. The meter image E2B is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and a meter value is represented by movement of the meter area. Also, the meter image E2B is disposed laterally adjacent to the bottom of the button image E2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), a point provision effect is executed. In this point provision effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point provision effect may be performed multiple times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image indicating that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. The point acquisition image E2C in FIG. 94B indicates that the player has been given 4 points (4P) to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). Further, in the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area is enlarged by the point being given, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E2B rises each time the point provision effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This point grant production, reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, hold change notice, pre-reading production, hold expectation degree suggestion production, or false It may be started in response to the execution of various effects such as a series effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a chance-up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged, and it is shown that the meter value is maximized (MAX. In addition, the chance-up image E2D indicates a chance-up. The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E2D of FIG. 94 (C), “GEKIATU suggests that the expectation of the jackpot is high. Is displayed, the chance-up image E2D is displayed in the button image E2A.

[Display effect in button image B]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B in the button image.
In the in-button image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the button meter display effect is executed as in FIG. 94 (A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the point provision effect is executed as in FIG. 94 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), a meter MAX notification effect is executed. In the meter MAX notification effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B disposed adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is maximized (MAX). The meter value suggesting image E2E is displayed when the meter value is maximum (MAX), and is an image indicating that the meter value is maximum (MAX). Further, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), a button depression effect is executed. In this button depression effect, a button image E2F, a meter value suggestion image E2E, and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E2A was, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. It is an image showing that. Specifically, the button image E2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image E2A is darkened and / or a state in which the button image E2A is lit. It is. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E2F, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the valid operation period. The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2F. The meter value suggestion image E2E may be displayed adjacent to the button image E2F instead of the button image E2F, or may be displayed in the meter image E2B. Further, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 95 (D) represents the maximum (MAX). Not limited to this, the meter value of the meter image E2B may be returned to the initial value (without the meter area).

  After the button depression effect, when the effect button 63 is depressed by the player by the button depression effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice, timer display production or pre-reading start notice A rendition can be performed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the display production in a button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B within the button image, the meter image E2B is displayed when the button image E2A is displayed, and the meter image E2B is displayed. When the meter value of the meter image E2B becomes maximum (MAX) after the display of the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, the player who looks at the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can associate the execution of a button effect using the effect button 63. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation to the jackpot regarding the button effect. Further, since the predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, it is possible to create a feeling of surprise in the predetermined effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 95, in the display effects A and B within the button image, the point application effect is executed when the meter image E1B is displayed, and the point application effect When the point acquisition image E2C is displayed and a predetermined point is given, the meter area is enlarged by the point given in the meter image E2B, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image is increased by the point addition, the player can recognize the increase of the meter value due to the point acquisition. Therefore, since the chance increase image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be displayed by the change of the meter value, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, a meter value indication suggests that the meter value of the meter image E2B is maximum (MAX) in the meter MAX notification effect in the display effect B in the button image The image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, as the meter value of the meter image E2B becomes maximum (MAX), the player is reminded that the button effect using the effect button 63 is executed before the button pressing effect. Can. Therefore, when the button effect (including the button depression effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot regarding the button effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, when the meter value of the meter image E2B becomes maximum (MAX) in the display effect B in the button image, the player presses the effect button 63. A prompt button image E2F is displayed, and a meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the meter value suggestion image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a jackpot in a predetermined effect developed by depression of the effect button 63. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the display of the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E in the display effects A and B in the button image is the meter value of the meter image E2B. Executed at maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the chance-up is increased as compared with the case where the display of the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is performed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). Expectation to the jackpot when the image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the display production in a button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the meter image E2B is arranged adjacent to the bottom of the button image E2A in the display effects A and B in the button image, but the present invention Is not limited to this. For example, the meter image E2B may be displayed in the button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in association with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and the other effect is not the button effect in relation to the meter display. If done, the player can be given a feeling of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the meter image E2B may be arranged apart from the button image E2A by a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, when the meter value of the meter image E2B is maximum (MAX) in the display effects A and B within the button image, the button image E2A is displayed. Although the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area (in the button image E2A), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B becomes maximum (MAX), an image suggesting a pseudo continuous effect, an image suggesting a reach notice, and a jackpot expectation degree in an area (within the button image E2A) where the button image E2A is displayed Even if various images such as an image suggesting an image and a timer image may be displayed, various effects such as effects of moving a predetermined character may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A). Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, in the button depression effect, the meter value suggestion image E2E is in the area (in the button image E2F) where the button image E2F is displayed. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the area (in the button image E2F) where the button image E2F is displayed, the chance-up image E2D, the image suggesting the pseudo-sequence effect, the image suggesting the reach notice, the jackpot expectation degree Various images such as suggested images may be displayed, or various effects such as effects of moving a predetermined character may be performed in the area (within button image E2A) in which button image E2A is displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by the provision of points in the display effects A and B in the button image. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases by the provision of points by the point provision effect. Good. In this case, when the meter value becomes a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94C or the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95C may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by the provision of points in the display effects A and B in the button image. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by execution of a predetermined operation instead of the point application by the point application effect. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94C and the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95C are executed. Note that "a predetermined action has been performed" means, for example, that a pseudo continuous action has been performed, that a hold icon has changed (that a hold change display has been made), and a predetermined chance-up effect is carried out. It includes what has been done, and success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, for the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the meter MAX notification effect may be executed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is not the maximum value (MAX) but a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a quarter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed on the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, after the chance-up image E2D is displayed with the chance-up effect in the display effect A in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0) You may return it to. After that, the point provision effect may be performed, and the effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, after the meter image E2B is displayed by the button depression effect in the display effect B in the button image, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0 You may return to). After that, the point provision effect may be performed, and the effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image in-display effects A and B are executed during one change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button in-image display The effects A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first of the plurality of modes,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed. In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode, the predetermined display is performed in an area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E2-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect to which a predetermined point is given,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. Display is performed in which the meter of the display effect of 2 is from the second aspect to the third aspect different from the first aspect,
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E2-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that suggests that the meter has become the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2.
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed when the second display effect is being performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the first display effect of the first display effect. Displayed in the control unit image of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E2-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and is an effect for displaying a second operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter becomes the first of the plurality of modes in the third display effect, and then the second operation unit The predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, characterized in that
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, the time when the meter becomes the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter becomes the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5, characterized in that

  The multiple variation effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. The plurality of change effects may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol over a plurality of changes (including reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Multiple fluctuation effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of variation effects A.
In the multiple change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the change meter display effect is executed. In the variable meter display effect, the hold icon E3 and the meter image E3C are displayed. The hold icon E3 is composed of a first hold icon E3B (up to eight) indicating hold and a second hold icon E3A indicating the hold. Note that among the first hold icons E3B, only the first hold icons (up to four) corresponding to the hold of the special view 1 are shown in the figure among the first hold icons E3B for the sake of simplicity. That is, in the figure, the first hold icon E3B corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, in the plural variation production, it shows similarly.

  The meter image E3C is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E3C is vertically disposed at the right end of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the fluctuation point provision effect is executed. The fluctuation point addition effect is an effect executed during the same fluctuation effect as the fluctuation meter display effect described above, and a hold icon E3, a meter image E3C, and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The said fluctuation | variation point provision presentation may be performed in multiple times during the same fluctuation production. The point acquisition image E3D is an image indicating that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E3D of FIG. 96 (B), it is shown that points are given to the player by 2 points (2P) (the player has acquired 2 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, it is shown that the meter area for the point is enlarged compared to that at the time of the variable meter display effect and the meter value is increased by the point being given. The meter value of the meter image E3C rises every time point application is performed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This fluctuation point grant production, such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, hold change notice, pre-reading production, hold expectation degree suggestion production, or , And may be started in response to various renditions such as simulated rendition being performed. Further, similarly, a subsequent fluctuation point addition effect described later may be performed in response to the execution of these various effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the next fluctuation point addition effect is executed. The next fluctuation point addition effect is an effect to be executed during the next fluctuation effect of the fluctuation (the fluctuation) for which the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display effect and the fluctuation point provision effect are executed, and the reserve icon E3 and the meter An image E3C and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next fluctuation point provision effect may be performed multiple times during the same fluctuation effect. In the point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 96C, it is shown that the player has been given 5 points (5P) to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, it is shown that the meter area for the point is enlarged more than that for the variable point presentation effect, and the meter value is increased, by giving the point.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a button depression effect is executed. This button depression effect is an effect executed during the same fluctuation effect as the above-mentioned next fluctuation point addition effect, and a button image E3E, a hold icon E3 and a meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E3E is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it was lit. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E3E, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period. Further, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 96 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96E, chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the hold icon E3 and the chance-up image E3F are displayed. The chance-up image E3F is an image indicating a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value is maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F of FIG. 96 (E), characters indicating “super hot !!” indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high are displayed. The chance-up image E3F is represented as a remark of the ally character CRA.

[Multiple fluctuation effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for describing a plurality of variation effects B.
In the multiple change effect B, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (E), the change meter display effect, the change point addition effect, the next change point addition effect, the button depression effect, and the chance-up effect To be executed. Each of these effects is basically, the fluctuation meter display effect shown in FIG. 96 (A) ~ FIG. 96 (E), the fluctuation point addition effect, the next fluctuation point addition effect, button depression effect, and chance up effect Basically, the plurality of change effects B are different in that the button image E3G is displayed in the change meter display effect, the change point application effect, and the next change point application effect. The button image E3G is disposed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 may be executed from this.

[Multiple fluctuation effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of variation effects C.
As shown in FIG. 98 (A), in the multiple variation effect C, the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a reserve icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (A), a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97 (A), and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter that moves the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure), and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area, and the area where the button image E3G is displayed (within the button image E3G) Will be placed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the fluctuation point provision effect is executed. The fluctuation point addition effect is an effect to be executed during the same fluctuation effect as the fluctuation meter display effect described above, and the same hold icon E3 as FIG. 96 (B) and the same point as FIG. 96 (B) An acquired image E3D, a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97 (B), and a meter image E3H are displayed. The variation point provision effect may be performed multiple times during the same variation effect. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that the meter area for the point is enlarged compared to that at the time of the variable meter display effect and the meter value is increased by the point being given. The meter value of the meter image E3H rises each time point application is performed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the next fluctuation point addition effect is executed. The next fluctuation point addition effect is an effect to be executed during the next fluctuation effect of the fluctuation (the fluctuation) for which the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display effect and the fluctuation point provision effect are executed, as shown in FIG. 96 (C) and The similar reserve icon E3, the point acquisition image E3D similar to FIG. 96C, the button image E3G similar to FIG. 97C, and the meter image E3H are displayed. This next change point provision effect may be performed multiple times during the same change effect. In the meter image E3H, the provision of the points indicates that the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged as compared to that at the time of the variable point presentation effect, and the meter value is increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a button depression effect is executed. This button depression effect is an effect executed during the same fluctuation effect as the above-mentioned next fluctuation point addition effect, and a button image E3E similar to FIG. 96 (D) and a hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (D) And the meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in the area (in the button image E3E) in which the button image E3E is displayed. The meter value of the meter image E3H of FIG. 98 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the hold icon E3, the button image E3G, the meter image E3H, and the timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E3I shown in FIG. 98E, “100 seconds” as the timer initial value is shown. The timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. When the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect as shown in FIG. 97 (E) may be executed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of multiple fluctuation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, in the plurality of variable effects A to C, the point application effect is executed across a plurality of continuous variable effects, that is, a plurality of variable effects Subsequently, predetermined points are acquired, and meter images E3C and E3H representing an accumulated value (accumulated points) of acquired points are displayed. When the meter value (cumulative point) of the meter image becomes maximum (MAX), a button pressing effect is executed in which a button image E3E for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. In response to the player's operation of the effect button 63, chance-up effect, timer display effect, etc. are executed. According to this configuration, even if the cumulative point does not reach the maximum (MAX) in one change production, the point is taken over to the next change production, so the player spans a plurality of change productions, You can enjoy the effect of earning points. In addition, since the button depression effect is executed when the accumulated point acquired across a plurality of variation effects is the maximum (MAX), the button depression effect can be emphasized. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 98, in a plurality of variable effects B and C, a point application effect is executed across a plurality of continuous change effects, that is, a plurality of change effects. Subsequently, predetermined points are acquired, and meter images E3C and E3H representing an accumulated value (accumulated points) of acquired points are displayed. When the meter images E3C and E3H are displayed, the display of the button image E3G is executed. According to this configuration, since the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 can be predicted by the accumulation of the points, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the plural variation effect C, an area (button image) in which the meter image E3H showing the accumulated value (accumulated points) of acquired points is displayed In E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in association with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and the other effect is not the button effect in relation to the meter display. If done, the player can be given a feeling of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 97, in the multiple variation effects A and B, after the button depression effect, the chance-up effect which is an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is executed. According to this configuration, since the chance-up effect indicating the jackpot expectation is executed based on the points accumulated over the plurality of fluctuation effects, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high in the chance-up effect The expectation of can be raised. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, after the button depression effect, the timer display effect is executed. According to this configuration, since the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated over the plurality of fluctuation effects, the effect with high jackpot expectation when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes 0 seconds Can increase expectations for being implemented. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is that the meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H is maximum (MAX) When executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed compared to the case where the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are executed when the meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). Expectation to the jackpot when developing into the timer display effect can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of multiple variation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, in a plurality of variation effects A to C, the point provision effect or the next variation point is provided as part of the pre-reading effect (continuous effect across a plurality of variations). It is good also as composition (the point which straddles a plurality of change productions as a part of pre-reading production) in which point grant in production is performed (structure which acquires points). According to this configuration, each time a point is earned, the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the plurality of variation effects A to C, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the accumulated points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by representing the remaining points until the accumulated point reaches the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or timer display effect is performed in a plurality of variation effects A to C, and a chance-up effect or timer Display effects may be performed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by the provision of points in the plurality of variation effects A to C. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the variable meter display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H become a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases due to the application of points by the point application effect It is good also as composition. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by the provision of points in the plurality of variation effects A to C. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by execution of a predetermined operation instead of the point application by the point application effect. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) are executed. Note that "a predetermined action has been performed" means, for example, that a pseudo continuous action has been performed, that a hold icon has changed (that a hold change display has been made), and a predetermined chance-up effect is carried out. It includes what has been done, and success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chances-up effect and the timer display effect are maximum values (MAX) of meter values of meter images E3C and E3H. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be performed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are not the maximum value (MAX) but become a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a quarter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed on the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the timer image E3I is displayed in the countdown mode in which the timer value counts down in the plural variation effect C, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed in a count-up system in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button depression effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the plurality of variation effects A to C are executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of variation effects A to C may be executed for one change presentation.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the multiple variation effects A to C, after the button depression effect, chance-up effect or timer display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and button depression Other effects may be performed after the effect. As other productions, various effects such as pseudo-series production, reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), big hit notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice or preview start notice It may be a configuration in which an effect can be performed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
Symbol display means capable of performing symbol fluctuation display to be stopped after variation display of symbols is started;
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit operable by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of acquiring predetermined points across a plurality of consecutive times of the symbol variation display, and performing point suggestion display suggesting accumulated points acquired,
The second display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and is an effect for displaying a first operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the cumulative point in the first display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed, and the player operates the operation unit. In response, a predetermined effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E3-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the first display effect may be performed in a region where the second operation unit image in the third display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display that suggests a jackpot expectation.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-6]
It is equipped with pre-reading effect execution expedient which can execute pre-reading effect,
In the first display effect, a predetermined point is acquired across a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays as the pre-reading effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-7]
When the second display effect is performed in the combination effect, it is when the cumulative point reaches the maximum value,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6, characterized in that

  The operation charge effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The operation charge effect is performed in parallel with the change effect of the decorative symbol. Of course, it includes running such as reach production (super reach production).

[Operation charge production A (success)]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for describing the operation charge effect A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), a sword movement effect is performed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG indicating the sword member 64 appears from the upper side to the right of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect is stopped.

The part of the handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, the regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are divided into six adjacent regions. The drawing colors of these areas R1 to R6 are initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order in the area R 2 → R 3 → R 4 → R 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a charge effect (end period) is performed. In the charge effect (end period), the drawing color of the region R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change of the drawing color of the region R5 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), a button depression instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation charge production A (failure)]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a sword movement effect is performed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG indicating the sword member 64 appears from the upper side to the right of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward by the sword movement effect is stopped.

The part of the handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, the regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are divided into six adjacent regions. The drawing colors of these areas R1 to R6 are initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of the region R2 is changed from blue to red.
Note that the variation start effect, the sword movement effect, the sword stop effect, and the charge effect (initial) in FIGS. 100 (A) to 100 (D) are the same effects as the operation charge effect (success) shown in FIG. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), charge presentation (middle term) is performed. In the charge effect (middle period), the drawing color of the region R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change of the drawing color of the area R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the fluctuation continuation effect is executed. In the fluctuation continuation effect, the display of the sword image KG is lost, and the same effect as the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 100 (A) is obtained. That is, when the area R3 turns from blue to red, the charge effect is interrupted and the same effect as the change start effect is performed.

[Operation charge production B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for describing the operation charge effect B.
First, in the operation charge effect B, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol during variation is displayed at the upper left. In the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B and the holding digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), a charge announcement effect is executed. In the charge announcement effect, the charge announcement image is displayed in a state where the button image BB1 indicating the presentation button 63 is displayed. Here, it is shown that an oval charge notice image JG1 marked "C" is displayed. The button image BB1 has five areas S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101C, a charge effect is performed. In the charge rendering, the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red, triggered by the appearance of the charge preview image in the above-described charge preview rendering. Here, a state in which the area S1 changes from blue to red is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a charge announcement effect is executed. The charge preview effect is the effect described in FIG. 101 (B), and shows a state in which the elliptical charge preview image JG2 described as “C × 4” is displayed here. In the charge preview image, “C × 2”, “C × 3”, “C × 4”, and “C × 5” are prepared separately from the charge image “C”. The number written after the "x" determines the number of areas that are changed from blue to red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), charge presentation is performed. The charge effect is the effect described in FIG. 101 (C), and the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge preview image appears. Here, the four areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red in correspondence to the “C × 4” charge preview image JG2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101F, a button depression instruction effect is executed. In the button depression instruction effect, an image for instructing depression of the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the text image TG "Press!" Is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas, and the drawing colors of these areas are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order, When the drawing color of all the areas is changed to red, the button depression instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change of the drawing color leads to the expectation of the player, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101 (B) and FIG. 101 (D), a charge notice image is displayed as a charge notice effect. As shown in FIG. 101C and FIG. 101E, the charge effect is executed in response to the display of the charge advance notice image. That is, the plurality of areas S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by the display of the charge preview image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charge notification image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (B), as shown in FIG. 101 (C), in the charge effect, drawing of one area S1 is performed. The color is changed from blue to red. On the other hand, when the charge preview image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the drawing colors of the two or more areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red as shown in FIG. 101 (E). Be According to this configuration, the degree of expectation of the player can be made different depending on the type of charge preview image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charge effect can be easily understood, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), when all the drawing colors in the regions R1 to R6 turn red, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the button pressing instruction effect is executed. Be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100E, when the areas R4 to R6 are blue even if the drawing color of the areas R1 to R3 is red, the button pressing instruction effect is not executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase expectations as to whether or not the charge effect will be successful, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the drawing colors of all the areas R1 to R6 of the sword image KG turn red, a button pressing instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the drawing color of all the areas B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 becomes red, the button pressing instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button pressing instruction effect may be performed when the drawing color of a part of the area becomes red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the handle portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas S1 to S6, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of regions.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the area is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the display of a wire frame shape is made such that the color of the area becomes the same color as the background color, the drawing color of the area of the wire frame image changes (color is applied) Good.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
A display unit capable of displaying an image of the operation unit;
The image of the operation means has a plurality of areas,
By changing the drawing colors of the plurality of areas from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the operation means to be moved to the operable state. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect E4-2]
A specific image can be displayed at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
A game machine characterized by changing the drawing colors of the plurality of areas from a first drawing color to a second drawing color in a predetermined order in response to the display of the specific image.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image of the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of areas is changed, and when the second specific image of the specific images is displayed, A game machine characterized by changing the drawing color of two or more areas of the areas.
[Aspect E4-4]
A game machine characterized in that the image of the operation means is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When all the drawing colors of the plurality of areas become the second drawing color, the operation means becomes operable, and when there is an area other than the second drawing color in the drawing colors of the plurality of areas, the operation means becomes A gaming machine characterized by not being in an operable state.

  The pseudo connected point effect will be described using FIGS. 102 to 103. FIG. The pseudo connected point effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol (during one change effect) (for example, at the start of the change of the decorative symbol or during the reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Simulated train point production A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo connected point effect A. As shown in FIG.
In the pseudo run point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102A, the pseudo run effect is executed. In this pseudo-series effect, a pseudo-series suggested image E5A and a meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo connected suggestion image E5A is an image reminiscent of a pseudo connected effect, and in detail, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the pseudo connected effect is the second time is shown. Also, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo symbol, 7". The meter image E5B is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and represents a meter value by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5B is disposed vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo series effect may be performed again after the point provision effect.

  In addition, the pseudo-series effect is an effect executed at the start of change deformation or during reach effect, etc. For example, an effect which repeats the effect of starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and temporarily stopping it, a predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol Along with an effect that repeats at least a part of temporary stop, a effect that repeats a temporary stop of a predetermined logo, or a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “x 2”, “x 3”, “pseudo” It includes an effect of executing a change effect of a decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a point provision effect is executed. This point provision effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo sequential effect, and a meter image E5B and a point acquisition image E5C are displayed. The point provision effect may be performed when the pseudo connected effect is performed again during the same change effect, or in accordance with another effect. That is, the point provision effect may be performed multiple times during the same change effect. The point acquisition image E5C is an image indicating that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E5C of FIG. 102B, it is shown that the player has been given 5 points (5P) to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E5B, it is shown that the meter area for the point is enlarged compared to that at the time of the variable meter display effect and the meter value is increased by the point being given. The meter value of the meter image E5B rises every time point application is performed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102C, a button depression effect is performed. In this button depression effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5B are displayed. The button image E5D is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E5D is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it was lit. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E5D, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period. Also, the meter image E5B in FIG. 102 (C) indicates that the meter value is maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image E5E is displayed. The chance-up image E5E is an image indicating a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value is maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E shown in FIG. 102 (D), the word “super hot !!” indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high is displayed. The chance-up image E5E is represented as a remark of the ally character CRA.

[Simulated train point production B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo connected point effect B. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the pseudo connected point effect B, the pseudo connected effect is executed. In this pseudo-series effect, a pseudo-series suggested image E5A, a button image E5G, and a meter image E5F similar to those of FIG. 102 (A) are displayed. The button image E5G is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. The meter image E5F is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and represents a meter value by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5F is horizontally arranged in the area (in the button image E5G) in which the button image E5G is displayed. Also, as in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with a logo symbol that suggests pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo symbol, 7". The pseudo series effect may be performed again after the point provision effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), a point provision effect is executed. This point provision effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo sequential effect, and a button image E5G, a meter image E5F, and a point acquisition image E5C similar to FIG. 102 (B) are displayed. The point provision effect may be performed again in the case where the pseudo sequential effect is performed again during the same change effect, or in accordance with another effect. That is, the point provision effect may be performed multiple times. In addition, in the meter image E5F disposed in the button image E5G, the point is given, so that the meter area for the point is enlarged compared to the time of the variable meter display effect, and it is shown that the meter value is increased. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F rises every time point application is performed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103C, a button depression effect is performed. In this button depression effect, a button image E5D similar to that in FIG. 102C and a meter image E5F are displayed. The meter image E5F is disposed in the area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, in the button image E5D. Further, the meter image E5F in FIG. 103C indicates that the meter value is maximum (MAX). The button image E5D has the same shape as the button image E5G.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103D, the timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this timer display effect, a button image E3G similar to FIG. 103 (A), a meter image E5F, and a timer image E5H are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E5H shown in FIG. 103 (D), "100 seconds" as the timer initial value is shown. The timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. When the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes “0 seconds”, a predetermined effect, for example, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) or the pseudo continuous effect may be executed again.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of false continuation point production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 to FIG. 103, in the pseudo linked point effects A and B, the simulated linked effect is executed, and the accumulated value of points provided by the point applying effect (cumulative points) Is represented using the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F, and the button image E5D is displayed in response to the meter value becoming maximum (MAX), and the chance is raised when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. An effect or timer display effect is executed. According to this configuration, when points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo-series effect, and when the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX), effects such as chance-up effect and timer display effect can be executed, so the pseudo-series effect is It can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo linked point effect B, the meter image E5F is displayed during the simulated linked effect, during the point added effect, and the like. According to this configuration, since the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 can be foreseen during the pseudo-series effect and during the point addition effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and improve the fun of the game. It can be done.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo connected point effect AB, the meter image E5F suggesting accumulated points is arranged in the area (in the button image E5G) in which the button image E5G is displayed. Ru. According to this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in association with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and the other effect is not the button effect in relation to the meter display. If done, the player can be given a feeling of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pseudo connected point effect A, after the button depression effect, a chance increase effect which is an effect that suggests a big hit expectation is executed. According to this configuration, since the chance-up effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-series effect, an expectation to the suggestion that the jackpot expectation degree is high in the chance-up effect comes out Can be enhanced. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo connected point effect B, after the button depression effect, the timer display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-series effect, so when the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes 0 seconds, the effect with a high hit probability is executed Can increase the sense of expectation for As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 to FIG. 103, in the pseudo connected point effects A and B, the chance-up effect or timer display effect is the maximum meter value of meter images E5B and E5G (MAX) Is executed when According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed compared to the case where the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5G are executed when the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). Expectation to the jackpot when developing into the timer display effect can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pseudo | simulation continuous point production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, when the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5F reaches the maximum (MAX) in the pseudo connected effects A and B, the button pressing effect is displayed. Although it is configured to be executed and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), chance-up effect or timer display effect may be executed even if the player does not press the effect button 63. Further, when the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5F becomes maximum (MAX), the button depression effect is not executed (the button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed. It is also good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 to FIG. 103, the cumulative points are represented by meter values of meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo connected point effects A and B, but the present invention It is not limited. For example, the accumulated points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by representing the remaining points until the accumulated point reaches the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, a button image is displayed when the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed in the pseudo connected point effects A and B, and the chance-up effect or The timer display effect may be performed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase by the provision of points in the pseudo connected point effects A and B. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F become a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value) at the time of the pseudo-series effect, and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases by the provision of points by the point provision effect It is also good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase by the provision of points in the pseudo connected point effects A and B. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by execution of a predetermined operation instead of the point application by the point application effect. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) are executed. Note that "a predetermined action has been performed" means, for example, that a pseudo continuous action has been performed, that a hold icon has changed (that a hold change display has been made), and a predetermined chance-up effect is carried out. It includes what has been done, and success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 to FIG. 103, in the pseudo connected point effects A and B, for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are maximum values (MAX ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be configured to be performed when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are not the maximum value (MAX) but a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a quarter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed on the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the timer image E5H is displayed in the countdown mode in which the timer value counts down in the pseudo connected point effect B, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button depression effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo connected point effects A and B are executed during one change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo connected point effects A , B may be performed during a plurality of continuous variable effects.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the button depression effect, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed in the pseudo connected point effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the button depression effect, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed again. Also, after the button pressing effect, another effect may be executed after the button pressing effect. As other productions, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice, or preview start notice are executed. It may be a configuration to obtain.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E5-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit operable by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a pseudo-sequence effect,
The second display effect is an effect that is given a certain point and is a point suggestion display that suggests the accumulated point of the given point,
The third display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and is an effect for displaying a first operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the certain point is given according to the first display effect being performed, and the point suggestion display is performed. Thereafter, the third display effect is performed in response to the accumulated point becoming a predetermined value, and the predetermined effect is performed when the player operates the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E5-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the first display effect is performed or when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the second display effect may be performed in a region where the second operation unit image in the fourth display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2, characterized in that
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display that suggests a jackpot expectation.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4, characterized in that
[Aspect E5-6]
When the third display effect is performed in the combination effect, it is when the cumulative point reaches the maximum value,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5, characterized in that

  The timer freeze effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The timer freeze effect may be performed, for example, at the start of the change display of the special symbol, at the start of the change effect of the decoration symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect) during the change effect of the decorative symbol.

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect A. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect A, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I1A shown in FIG. 104 (A), "100 seconds" as the timer initial value is shown. In the timer display effect, the friend character CRA is also displayed. In the display effects shown below, the description of the teammate character CRA is omitted unless it is particularly necessary. Further, in the upper right of FIG. 104 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is in the process of being changed, that is, it is in the reach state. . In the following, when it is indicated that such a reach state is shown, the description thereof will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, an effect that the timer value of the timer image I1A stops at "77.7 seconds" is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), a jackpot notification effect is executed in which the timer value stopped at the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol array of the decorative symbol, and this is notified as a big hit symbol array.

[Timer freeze effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for describing the timer freeze effect B.
First, in the timer freeze effect B, as shown in FIG. 105A, the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. The timer image I1A is the same as the timer image I1A of FIG. 104A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and “100 seconds” is shown as an initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I1C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I1B is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I1B is on. It is. In addition, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The timer image I1A indicates “80 seconds”, which indicates that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has been started from 80 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 105C, the timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect, an effect of stopping the timer value of the timer image I1A in 77.7 seconds is executed. Since the button valid display effect starts from a timer value of 80 seconds, the effect button 63 may be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, the speed is changed at a high speed of 79 seconds and stopped at “77.7 seconds”. The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be immediately stopped at 77.7 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), as in FIG. 104 (C), the timer value stopped at the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol array of the decorative symbol, and it is reported as a large hit symbol array. Informing effect is executed.

[Timer Freeze Production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect C.
First, in the timer freeze effect C, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1D and a button image I1B are displayed. Similar to FIG. 105 (A), the button image I1B is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this. In the timer image I1D, the timer value is displayed by the count-up method, and "0 seconds" is set as the initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1D are displayed. Similar to FIG. 105 (B), the button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I1C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. In addition, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The timer image I1D indicates “75 seconds”, which indicates that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has started from 75 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 106C, the timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect, an effect of stopping the timer value of the timer image I1A in 77.7 seconds is executed. Since the button valid display effect starts from a timer value of 75 seconds, the effect button 63 may be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, the speed is changed at a high speed of 76 seconds and stopped at "77.7 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be immediately stopped at 77.7 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), similarly to FIG. 105 (D), the timer value stopped at the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol array of the decorative symbol, and it is reported as a large hit symbol array. Informing effect is executed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer freeze production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer display (display of the timer image) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) A display for causing a big hit is performed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is executed, and the timer is operated in response to the player operating the effect button 63. A display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display for notifying a jackpot using the stopped timer value is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of unexpectedness, to give the feeling of participating in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, in the case where the display is made to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at the predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, When the timer value becomes a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) before the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is started, and the effect button 63 is performed within the effective operation period. When there is an operation of, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpectedness, to suppress the player from being out of the operation timing of the effect button 63, and to improve the participation rate to the game. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 106, after the display to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at the predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect is displayed, the big hit In the notification effect, the jackpot is notified by making the symbol array of the decorative symbol the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 106, a display is made to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at the predetermined value (77.7 seconds) which becomes the sloppy eye by the timer stop effect. After that, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is notified by making the symbol array of the decorative symbol the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) which becomes the broken eye stopped by the timer stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been made intelligibly, and the player can quickly recognize the jackpot. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer freeze production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is executed, and the player operates the effect button 63 by the display of the button image I1C. According to the above, the display to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at the predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and the display to notify the big hit using the stopped timer value is executed. The invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the effect button 63, the display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed. It is also possible to execute a display notifying a big hit using the stopped timer value.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 106, after the display to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at the predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect is displayed, the big hit In the notification effect, the jackpot is notified by making the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the big hit may be notified by using the timer value (77.7 seconds) of the timer display stopped in the timer stop effect as it is.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 106, the timer value stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be other Zoromata, such as 11.1, 111, 33.3. Further, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to Zoro, and may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be the number of seconds obtained by subtracting the timer value for stopping due to the timer stop effect described later from the number of start seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, 2.3 seconds may be set as the effective operation period.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images may be displayed simultaneously. It is also good.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
Aspect I1-1
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display,
The display may be displayed in a first manner,
In the second aspect, the display may be displayed,
In the third aspect, the display may be displayed,
The certain display of the first aspect is a display of a mode including a display for counting a timer value using a timer image,
The certain display of the second aspect is a display of a mode including a display for stopping the timer value of the timer image at a first predetermined value,
The certain display of the third aspect is a display of a mode including a display indicating a jackpot using a timer value of a timer image,
The certain display is a display which may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode and then displayed in the third mode.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect I1-2]
It has an operation unit capable of accepting a player's operation and performing a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
In the fourth aspect, the display may be displayed,
The certain display of the fourth aspect is a display of an aspect including a display of an operation part image prompting the player to operate the operation part,
The certain display is displayed in the fourth mode when displayed in the first mode, and the player operates the operating section by the display of the operating section image in the fourth mode. In response to the display, the display may be displayed in the second mode, and may be displayed in the third mode after being displayed in the second mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1, characterized in that

[Aspect 3]
When the display of the second aspect is performed in the certain display, when the timer value reaches a second predetermined value before the first predetermined value, the operation of the operation unit is effective. A period is started, and when the operation unit is operated within the operation valid period, the timer value is stopped at the first predetermined value,
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2, characterized in that

[Aspect 4]
The said 3rd aspect is a display which suggests a big hit using a decorative pattern,
In the case where the display of the third aspect is made after the display of the second aspect is made in the certain display, the symbol array of the decorative symbol is stopped in the second aspect. Suggesting a jackpot by making it the same as the predetermined value of 1,
A game machine according to any one of aspects I1-1 to I1-3, characterized in that

[Aspect 5]
The symbol array of the decorative symbol, which is the same as the first predetermined value stopped in the second aspect, is Zoromes.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized in that

  The chance up meter effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. This chance up meter effect, during the jackpot game, during the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, when the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach production), etc. Can be performed.

[Chance up meter production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect A.
In the chance up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are displayed. Chance-up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance-up suggested suggestion image I2A2, and a chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position Represents the period of chance up meter production. The chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 is placed on the meter image I2AA. When the cursor image I2A1 moves and the cursor image I2A1 overlaps with the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 (when they coincide), the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance up presentation is executed, the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance up completed suggestion image I2A2. The chance up completed suggestion image I2A2 is arranged on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance up presentation has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image I2AA, when the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3, it indicates from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing when the chance-up effect can be performed.

  The timer image I2B is displayed while the chance up meter image I2A is displayed. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at the start of the chance up meter effect presentation or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggested image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 15 seconds is set as an initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107B, in the timing matching display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timing when the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. An effect is performed to indicate that the two match. The timing matching display effect is not limited to this, and the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, It may be an effect representing that the timing when 7.77 seconds) is matched.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), high expectation degree chance up presentation is executed. In high expectation degree chance up production, high expectation degree chance up image I2C is displayed. The high expectation degree chance-up image I2C is an image indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high.

  On the other hand, in the timing non-matching effect shown in FIG. 107 (D), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timing when the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds An effect is produced to indicate that they do not match. The timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, It may be an effect representing that the timing when 7.77 seconds is not matched.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the low expectation degree chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation degree chance up presentation, a low expectation degree chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation degree chance-up image I2D is an image which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. That is, when the low expectation degree chance-up image I2D appears, the jackpot expectation degree is lower than when the high expectation degree chance-up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect B.
In the chance up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2B, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are the same as in FIG. 107 (A), and thus the description thereof is omitted. The button image I2E is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 108 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 108 (B), in the timing coincidence display effect, as in FIG. 107 (B), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer image I2B. An effect is produced that indicates that the timing at which the timer value at time 0 becomes 0 seconds matches.

  In addition, a button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I2F is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. It is. In addition, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I2F, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed. The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before it becomes "0 second". The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), high expectation degree chance up representation is executed. In the high expectation degree chance up effect, the high expectation degree chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the display of the button image I2F. The high expectation degree chance-up image I2C is an image which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

  On the other hand, in the timing non-matching effect shown in FIG. 108 (D), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer in the timer image I2B as in FIG. 107 (D) An effect is produced to indicate that the timing at which the value becomes 0 seconds does not match. In addition, a button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image similar to that of FIG. 108 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), the low expectation degree chance up representation is executed. In the low expectation degree chance up presentation, a low expectation degree chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation degree chance-up image I2D is an image which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, as in FIG. 108 (E).

[Chance up meter production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect C.
In the chance up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2G, and a button image I2E are displayed. Since the chance up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as in FIG. 108 (A), the description will be omitted. The timer image I2G is displayed during display of the chance up meter image I2A. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at the start of the chance up meter effect presentation or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggested image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, the timer value is displayed by the count-up method, and 0 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 109 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 109B, in the timing coincidence display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. The button image I2H is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I2H is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. It is. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I2H, the characters “press !!” are also displayed.
Then, in the timing coincidence display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, the timing when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value, and the button image I2H is displayed Represents a match.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), high expectation degree chance up representation is executed. In the high expectation degree chance up effect, the high expectation degree chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the display of the button image I2H. The high expectation degree chance-up image I2C is an image which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

  On the other hand, in the timing non-matching effect shown in FIG. 109D, as in the case of FIG. 109B, when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. Then, in the timing mismatch display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, the timing when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value, and the button image I2H is displayed Indicates that they do not match.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), the low expectation degree chance up representation is executed. In the low expectation degree chance up presentation, a low expectation degree chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation degree chance-up image I2D is an image which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, as in FIG. 107 (E).

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the chance up meter effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timer display (display of the timer image) is executed while the chance up meter image I2A is displayed (chance up meter effect presentation). ing. According to this configuration, since the display that handles two different types of time is made, the player can have a sense of expectation over time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 109, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image are set to predetermined values. The high expectation degree chance up effect or the low expectation degree chance up effect may be executed based on the timing to become. According to this configuration, since the high expectation degree chance-up effect can be executed based on the display that handles two different types of time, the player can have a greater sense of expectation by the progress of these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image are set to predetermined values. There is a case where the high expectation degree chance up effect is executed when the timing when the According to this configuration, when a display handling two different types of time is synchronized, a high expectation degree chance up effect can be executed, so that the player has a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 109, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image are set to predetermined values. The low expectation degree chance up effect may be executed when there is no match with the According to this configuration, when a display handling two different types of time is not synchronized, a low expectation chance up effect can be executed, so that the player has a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. Can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value in the timing coincidence display effect or the timing noncoincidence display effect, the effect button 63 is displayed to the player. The button image I2H for promoting pressing of the button is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of chance up meter production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the chance up meter display and the timer display are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and a display indicating other elapsed time may be performed. Here, the display indicating the passage of other time may be, for example, a meter or an indicator indicating time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image When the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value matches, the high expectation degree chance up effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings coincide with each other, various effects may be performed such as pseudo-sequence effect, effect representing the type of reach, and notice to suggest development to super reach effect. In this case, the effects after the timing non-matching display effects may be different from these effects. Also in this case, as the effect to be executed when the timings coincide, an effect having a high probability of having a big hit than the effect performed when the timings do not coincide is selected.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up scheduled suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image When the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value does not match, the low expectation degree chance up effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings do not match, various effects may be performed such as pseudo-sequence effect, effect representing the type of reach, and notice to suggest development to super reach effect. In this case, the effects after the timing matching display effects may be different from these effects. Also in this case, as the effect to be executed when the timings do not match, an effect whose jackpot expectation is lower than the effect performed when the timings match are selected.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance up meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images may be displayed simultaneously. May be

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the chance-up effect, the high expectation degree chance up image I2C and the low expectation degree chance up image I2D are used to suggest a chance up, but the present invention It is not limited. For example, as a chance up, the jackpot expectation is specifically displayed ("Expected degree 50%!", Etc.), a color is displayed to indicate the jackpot expectation, a voice is suggested to indicate the jackpot expectation, A predetermined character may be displayed to indicate the jackpot expectation.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The first period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
The first period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display represents the start to the end of the certain period by moving from the start position to the end position through the specific position,
The first period display is a display including a specific position display for notifying the specific position,
By moving the cursor display from the start position to the specific position, it represents from the start of the certain period to the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
The second period display may be performed during the first period display,
A game machine characterized by
Aspect 12-2
One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display different from the first effect display,
The second period display is a timer display,
When the second period display is performed during the first period display, the second effect is generated based on the first timing and a second timing at which the timer display has a predetermined value. May run the display,
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1, characterized in that
[Aspect I2-3]
When the second period display is performed during the first period display, the first timing matches the second timing at which the timer display has a predetermined value. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2, characterized in that
[Aspect I2-4]
When the second period display is performed during the first period display, the first timing does not coincide with the second timing at which the timer display has a predetermined value. The first effect display may be performed at a first timing,
A game machine according to any one of Aspects I2-2 and I2-3.
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including a first chance up effect,
The second effect display is a display including a second chance-up effect whose jackpot expectation is higher than the first chance-up effect.
A game machine according to any one of aspects I2-2 to I2-4, characterized in that
[Aspect I2-6]
The second effect display is an effect having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first effect display.
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects 2 to 5, characterized in that:
[Aspect 7]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of an operation unit image for the player to facilitate the operation of the operation unit,
When the timer display is performed, the display of the operation unit image is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-6, characterized in that

  The hold timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. This hold timer effect is during the change effect of the decoration symbol (for example, at the start of the change symbol display of the special symbol, the start of the change effect of the decoration symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect)) or during the big hit game etc. It can be implemented. The hold timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed across a plurality of changes, and the hold timer effect C is an effect that can be performed with the changes.

[Holding timer effect A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect A.
In the hold timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are displayed. The hold icon I3 is composed of a first hold icon I3B (up to eight) indicating hold and a second hold icon I3A indicating the hold. In order to simplify the description, in the drawing, only the first hold icon (up to four) corresponding to the hold of the special view 1 is shown among the first hold icon I3B. Therefore, the first holding icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the holding image 9A. Hereinafter, in holding timer effect, it shows similarly.

  The timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I3C shown in FIG. 110 (A), 15 seconds as the timer initial value is shown. The timer image I3C is displayed adjacent to be associated with the specific first reserved icon I3B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one along with the hold shift, and then an effect is performed in which the timer value of the timer image I3C is 0 seconds. Ru. In the upper right of FIG. 110 (B), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, that is, all the decorative symbols are changing. In the following, in the case of such a state, the description thereof will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110C, the hold change display effect is executed. In this hold change display effect, the color of the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C changes, and a character indicating "Heat" is displayed on the hold icon. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation has increased in the fluctuation effect corresponding to the first reserved icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the on-hold change display effect suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the change effect corresponding to the first on-hold icon I3B that has been associated with the timer image I3C.

[Holding timer effect B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect B.
In the hold timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, the hold icon I3 (the first hold icon I3B and the second hold icon I3A), the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are displayed. The hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as those in FIG.
The button image I3D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is foreseen that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from this.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one along with the hold shift, and then the timer image of the timer image I3C is "0" seconds. To be executed.

  Further, in the time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I3E is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I3D is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I3D is lit. It is. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I3E, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a retention expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. In this holding expectation indicatory effect, the holding expectation indicator I3F is displayed to correspond to the first holding icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The retention expectation degree suggestion image I3F suggests a jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the associated first retention icon I3B. The retention expectation degree suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Holding timer effect C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect C.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 112A, a hold icon I3 (first hold icon I3B and second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacent to be associated with the second hold icon I3A. The functions of the reserve icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as those in FIG. 111A, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the hold timer effect, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a timeout display effect is performed. In this time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed as in FIG. 111 (B), and the effect that the timer value of the timer image I3C is “0” second is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a pseudo continuous effect production is performed. In this pseudo-series effect, the pseudo-series suggested suggestion image I3G is displayed to correspond to the second reserved icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-series suggestion suggestion image I3G suggests that pseudo-series rendering is being performed and the number of pseudo-series renderings in the fluctuation representation (the corresponding fluctuation presentation) corresponding to the corresponding second reserved icon I3A. . The pseudo continuous suggested suggestion image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

  In addition, the pseudo-series effect is an effect executed at the start of change deformation or during reach effect, etc. For example, an effect which repeats the effect of starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and temporarily stopping it, a predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol Along with an effect that repeats at least a part of temporary stop, a effect that repeats a temporary stop of a predetermined logo, or a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “x 2”, “x 3”, “pseudo” It includes an effect of executing a change effect of a decorative symbol.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the hold timer effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and a predetermined effect (hold is made based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A change display effect, a hold expectation degree suggestive effect, or a pseudo continuous effect effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player's interest in holding can be attracted, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (hold change display effect, hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or pseudo link effect) is performed on the held icon I3. According to this configuration, it is possible to further attract the interest of the player for a specific hold, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and can increase the player's interest in the specific hold. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. An effect (hold change indication effect or hold expectation degree indication effect) indicating the jackpot expectation degree is executed on the hold icon I3. According to this configuration, since the effect indicating the big hit expectation is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, the player's interest can be made deeper, and as a result, It can improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the hold corresponding to the timer image I3C is displayed based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. The hold change display effect is performed on the icon I3. According to this configuration, since the mode of the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C changes, the player's interest can be made deeper, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or pseudo continuous effect) is performed on the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, while the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value, the player's interest can be attracted to the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. It can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 112, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the button image I3E for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, a predetermined effect (held expectation degree suggestive effect or pseudo continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from shifting the operation timing of the effect button 63, it is possible to improve the participation rate in the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of holding timer production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-mentioned timeout display effect can be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the pseudo-series effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects, for example, a pending change display effect as shown in FIG. 110 (C), a holding expectation indication effect as shown in FIG. 111 (C), or a chance Up production may be performed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B and the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the hold change display effect or the hold expectation degree suggestion effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute other effects such as pseudo-sequence effects and chance-up effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3 and the timer value becomes 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, Although a retention expectation degree suggestion production or a pseudo-series production is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and a predetermined effect may be executed when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the holding timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more The timer image of may be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. 110 to 111 are effects performed across a plurality of changes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the changes It may be an effect to be executed only. In addition, although the hold timer effect C shown in FIG. 112 is an effect to be executed by the change, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect to be executed across a plurality of changes may be also performed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I 3-1]
A gaming machine having display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons;
The hold icon includes an icon indicating hold and an icon indicating the hold,
The number of displayed pending icons can be notified by the number of displayed pending icons,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
In some cases, a first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects.
A second effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
The first effect is an effect of displaying a timer,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other, The second effect is performed based on the timer display of the first effect,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect 13-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed in association with each other, and the second icon is displayed for the pending icon associated with the timer display based on the timer display. Production of is performed,
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect 13-3]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
Game machine according to aspect I3-1 or aspect I3-2 characterized by [Aspect I3-4]
The second effect is an effect of performing a jackpot expectation degree indication display,
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects 1 to 3, characterized in that
[Aspect 13-5]
The big hit expectation indication is a display that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-4, characterized in that
[Aspect 13-6]
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-5, characterized in that
[Aspect 13-7]
It has an operation unit that can be operated by the player,
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit is displayed, and there is an operation of the operation unit by the player When the second effect is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-6, characterized in that

  The timer ball obtaining effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This out ball acquisition presentation can be performed, for example, during reach presentation (super reach presentation), etc., during the change presentation of the decorative symbol. In particular, the timer out ball acquisition presentation can be executed at the end of the reach presentation (super reach presentation).

[Timer withdrawal ball production effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the timer popped ball acquisition effect A.
As shown in FIG. 113 (A), the jackpot notification effect is executed in the timer pop-out item acquisition effect A. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 113 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is aligned with 7 symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the ally character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I4A shown in FIG. 113 (B), "5 seconds" as the timer initial value is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the payout scheduled withdrawal ball display effect is executed. In the scheduled withdrawal ball display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I4A is 0 seconds, a scheduled withdrawal ball number suggested image I4B is displayed. The scheduled payout number-of-balls out suggestion image I4B is an image that suggests the number of jackpots out of the scheduled payout in the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 113 (C), it is shown that 1500 balls can be paid out during the jackpot game in the planned number-of-payout balls suggested image I4B.

[Timer withdrawal ball production effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the timer popped ball acquisition effect B.
As shown in FIG. 114 (A), the jackpot notification effect is executed in the timer bonus ball acquisition effect B. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown as in FIG. 113 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the ally character CRA are displayed as in FIG. 113 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a button depression promoting display effect is executed. In this button depression prompting display effect, the timer image of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds", and the button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I4C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and represents a state as if it was lit. Further, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I 4 C, the characters “Press !!” are also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the payout scheduled withdrawal ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled withdrawal balls display effect, in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, a scheduled withdrawal balls number suggested image I4B is displayed as in FIG. 113 (C).

[Timer withdrawal ball production effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the timer popped ball acquisition effect C.
As shown in FIG. 115 (A), the jackpot notification effect is executed in the timer popped ball acquisition effect C. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using a decorative symbol is shown as in FIG. 113 (A).

Next, the timer display effect (timer initial value is large) shown in FIG. 115 (B) or the timer display effect (timer initial value is small) shown in FIG. 115 (E) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the timer display effect (timer initial value is large), a timer image I4D of “15 seconds” having a relatively large timer initial value is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a button depression promoting display effect is executed. In this button depression prompting display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes “0 seconds”, and the button image I4C is displayed as in FIG. 114 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the payout scheduled withdrawal ball display effect is executed. Similar to FIG. 114 (D), in this payout scheduled withdrawal display effect, it is suggested that the number of scheduled withdrawals is 1500, which is relatively large in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. The number-of-disbursements-predetermined-disbursed-number suggested image I4B is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (the timer initial value is small) shown in FIG. 115 (E), the timer image I4A of "5 seconds" having a relatively small timer initial value is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a button depression promoting display effect is executed. In this button depression prompting effect, as with FIG. 114 (C), the timer value of the timer image I 4 A becomes “0 seconds”, and the button image I 4 C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the payout scheduled withdrawal ball display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, the scheduled payout number of balls suggested image I4E suggests that the number of scheduled withdrawals is 700, which is relatively small in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. Is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the timer out ball acquisition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and expected payout number-of-balls out suggested images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, since the timer display is performed before the payout scheduled withdrawal number suggestion display is performed, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the scheduled payout number of withdrawals. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the expected payout number-of-balls suggested images I4B and I4E are displayed. Be done. According to this configuration, when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the display of the scheduled payout number of balls is performed, so it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the scheduled payout number of balls. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and a button image I4C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. In response to depression of the effect button 63, the scheduled payout number-of-balls out suggested images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer out-of-the-ball acquisition effect C, the timer image I4D having a relatively large timer initial value is displayed. Is larger in value representing the number of scheduled withdrawals indicated by the scheduled withdrawal balls number suggested image in the scheduled withdrawal balls display effect compared to when the timer image I4A having a relatively small timer initial value is displayed . According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest with respect to the timer display before the display of the payout expected ball number suggestion image is performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer out-of-the-ball acquisition presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer value of the timer images I4A and I4D has become 0 seconds in the button depression promoting display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the timer pop-out acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 is at the start of the change display of the special symbol, during the change effect of the decoration symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display effect, the button depression promotion effect, and the payout scheduled withdrawal display effect among the timer withdrawal game production may be configured to be executed during the big hit game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer ball obtaining effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. The timer image may be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when the value becomes a predetermined value, the above-mentioned timeout display effect can be performed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display,
The certain display is a display performed when a jackpot lottery is won,
The display may be displayed in a first manner,
In the second aspect, the display may be displayed,
The first aspect is an aspect including a timer display,
The second aspect is an aspect including a scheduled payout number indication indicating the number of gaming media scheduled to be paid out during a jackpot game based on a jackpot,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second mode after the timer value of the timer display in the first mode reaches a first predetermined value.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized in that
[Aspect I4-3]
It has an operation unit capable of accepting a player's operation and performing a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
In the third aspect, the display may be displayed,
The third aspect is an aspect including display of an operation unit image prompting a player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, and is displayed in the third mode when displayed in the first mode, and thereafter, the player operates the operation unit May be displayed in the second mode depending on
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1 or aspect I4-2.
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, and is displayed in the third mode before the timer value in the first mode becomes a second predetermined value, and then the operation is performed by the player May be displayed in the second mode in response to a section operation being performed,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-3, characterized in that
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, there are cases where the initial value of the timer value is a first value and a second value larger than the first value,
In the case where the display is performed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode with the certain display, the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the second value The number of game media to be paid out indicated by the scheduled number of payouts indication in the second mode, as compared to the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the first value. The value to represent is large,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I4-1 to I4-4, characterized in that

[Other modifications]
Although the gaming machine 1 of the said embodiment mentioned and demonstrated the pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a ball game machine in place of a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the invention is not limited thereto. A lever, a handle, a trigger or the like may be used as an operation unit to be operated by the player. It is also good. Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be performed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, time is displayed using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Time may be represented by a meter method or an indicator method as the timer display.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine which does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed type gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may combine two or more presentation examples and / or a modification among several presentation examples and / or a modification which were mentioned above. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may have a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be performed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of the above-mentioned aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and the scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes the equivalents thereof.

1 ... gaming machine 3 ... gaming area 7 ... image display device (display means)
7a: Display screen 9A, 9B, 9C: Hold icon 15: Board movable body 63: Effect button (operation means)
64 ... sword member (operation means)
65 ... Sword button (operation means)
68 ... Select button (operation means)
81 ... microcomputer for game control 91 ... microcomputer for effect control 101 ... microcomputer for image control

Claims (6)

A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position, and the first image is the first image. It is possible to execute a second effect which moves from the position of the second position to the second position and disappears in the second position so as to overlap with the second image. The gaming machine according to claim 1 further comprises:
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first image appears from the second image after the second effect. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the first image of the third effect appears from the side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or claim 3 further comprises:
It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the first image stops at a third position after the third effect. It is a game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
A game machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising:
It has an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is an image representing the appearance of the operation means.

Images